TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
.............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
...........................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
............................63
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
.................................157
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................231
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
.............................................311
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................................327
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
................................................385
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
.......................................405
10
INDEX
...................................................................413
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE:
After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner’s manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 5
1
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures, which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures,
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration, and the title.
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove the VIN.
VIN LOCATION
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.
INTRODUCTION 7
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys
.................11
▫ Ignition Key Removal ...................11
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................12
䡵 Sentry Key
............................13
▫ Replacement Keys ......................14
▫ Customer Key Programming ..............14
▫ General Information ....................15
䡵 Security Alarm System — If Equipped
.......15
▫ Rearming Of The System .................15
▫ To Arm The System .....................15
▫ To Disarm The System ...................16
䡵 Illuminated Entry System
.................17
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry
....................17
▫ To Unlock The Doors ...................18
▫ To Lock The Doors .....................20
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk ...................20
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ..................20
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters ........21
▫ Battery Replacement ....................21
▫ General Information ....................22
䡵 Door Locks
...........................22
▫ Manual Door Locks .....................22
2
▫ Power Door Locks .....................23
▫ Child Protection Door Lock ...............25
䡵 Windows
.............................27
▫ Power Windows .......................27
▫ Wind Buffeting ........................30
䡵 Trunk Lock And Release
..................31
䡵 Trunk Safety Warning
....................31
▫ Trunk Emergency Release ................32
䡵 Occupant Restraints
.....................32
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .....................33
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .....38
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners ...................38
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert) ...........................38
▫ Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped .....39
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ............40
▫ Seat Belt Extender ......................40
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag ............41
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...............49
▫ Child Restraint ........................50
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations
..........58
䡵 Safety Tips
............................59
▫ Transporting Passengers .................59
▫ Lock Your Vehicle ......................59
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................59
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ..............................60
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ....................61
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
You can insert the double-sided keys into the locks with
either side up.
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
Ignition Key Removal
The shift lever must be in PARK. Turn the key to the
LOCK position, and then remove the key.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after
the ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
Vehicle Key Ignition Key Positions
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
2
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. For details, refer to “Delay
Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4 of this manual.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the driver’s door and the key is in the ignition
switch, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the
key.
NOTE:
The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC
positions.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two (2)
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the
engine.
NOTE:
A key, which has not been programmed, is also
considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
turn on for three (3) seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is
a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to start the engine. Either of
these conditions will result in the engine being shut off
after two (2) seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on
during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in
the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle ser-
viced as soon as possible.
NOTE:
•
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
•
Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
any other transponder-equipped components on the
same key chain will not
cause a key-related (tran-
sponder) fault unless the additional part is physi-
cally held against the ignition key being used
when starting the vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or
other RF electronics will not cause interference with
this system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
2
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE:
Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit PIN number. This number is required
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key is one, which has never been
programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
dealer.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid sentry keys, you can program new
sentry keys to the system by performing the following
procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds, a chime
will sound and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator
Light will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch OFF
and remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds, a single chime will sound and the Vehicle
Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing, turn on
again for 3 seconds, and then turn off.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The new Sentry Key is programmed. The Keyless Entry
Transmitter will also be programmed during this pro-
cedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys. If you do
not have a programmed sentry key, contact your dealer
for details.
NOTE:
If a programmed key is lost, see your dealer to
have all remaining keys erased from the systems
memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your
vehicle. The remaining keys must then be repro-
grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at
the time of service to be reprogrammed.
General Information
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for
unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm,
the system will prevent the vehicle from starting and
provide the following audible and visual signals: the
horn will pulse; the headlights will flash; the park lights
will flash; and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator light
in the instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming of the System:
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the system will turn off the horn after 3
minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes,
and then the system will rearm itself.
To Arm the System:
Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press
a power door lock switch while the driver or passenger
door is open or press the LOCK button on the keyless
entry transmitter. After the last door is closed, or if all
doors are closed, the system will arm itself in about 16
seconds. During that time, the Vehicle Security Alarm
Indicator light will flash. If it does not illuminate, the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
system is not arming. Also, if you open a door during the
arming period, the system will cancel the arming process.
If you wish to rearm the system after closing the door,
you must repeat one of the previously described arming
sequences.
To Disarm the System:
Either press the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter or insert a valid sentry key into the
ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON/START
position.
NOTE:
•
The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the keyless entry transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
system.
•
The system remains armed during trunk entry. Press-
ing the trunk button will not disarm the system. If
someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and
opens any door the alarm will sound.
•
When the system is armed, the interior power door
lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect
your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
system will arm regardless of whether you are in the
vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
system.
If the alarm system is armed and the battery becomes
disconnected the system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, the
horn will sound, and the ignition will not start the
vehicle. If this occurs, disarm the system.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the system in your absence,
the horn will sound three times when you disarm the
system. Check the vehicle for tampering.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless
entry transmitter or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if so equipped). For details, refer to
“Outside Mirrors with Turn Signal & Approach Light-
ing” under “Mirrors” in Section 3 of this manual.
The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they
will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is
turned ON from the LOCK position.
NOTE:
•
None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer
control is in the “defeat” position (extreme downward
position), unless the overhead map/reading lights are
turned on manually.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open
the trunk, or activate the panic alarm from distances up
to about 23 feet (7 meters) using a hand held radio
transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE:
Inserting the key into the ignition switch dis-
ables all buttons on that transmitter; however, the but-
tons on the remaining transmitters will continue to work.
Shifting the vehicle out of PARK disables all transmitter
buttons for all keys.
Keyless Entry Transmitter
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
To unlock the doors:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock all
doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge
the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also
turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the transmitter. To change the cur-
rent setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote Key
Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Pro-
grammable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual
for details.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but not longer than 10
seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button
while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter
with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE:
Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter.
This feature can be turned on or off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Flash Lights with
Remote Key Lock,” under ⬙Personal Settings (Cus-
tomer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual for details.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but not longer than 10
seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while
still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter
with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE:
Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the transmitter. The
time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). For details, refer to “Turn Headlights On with
Remote Key Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Cus-
tomer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
To lock the doors:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the
horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as
follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Sound Horn with
Remote Key Lock,” under “Personal Settings (Cus-
tomer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual for details.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed transmitter
for at least 4 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
Then, press the PANIC button while still holding the
LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter with the
ignition in the LOCK position, and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE:
Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
To unlatch the trunk:
Press the trunk button on the transmitter two times to
unlatch the trunk.
Using The Panic Alarm:
To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you
turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second
time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)
or greater.
NOTE:
•
The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON position while the panic
alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
•
You may need to be less than 23 feet (7 meters) from
the vehicle when using the transmitter to turn off the
panic alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to SENTRY KEY “Customer Key Programming.”
(See page 14 for more information.)
If you do not have a programmed transmitter, contact
your dealer for details.
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE:
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. With the transmitter buttons facing downward, re-
move the small screw (if equipped).
2. Separate the two halves of the transmitter with a flat
blade tool. Do not damage the rubber seal during re-
moval.
Separating Transmitter Halves
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
3. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4.
To assemble the transmitter case, snap the two halves
together. If so equipped, install and tighten the screw until snug.
Make sure there is an even “gap” between the two halves.
5. Test the transmitter operation.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter fails to operate
from a normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the
door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward.
Door Lock Plunger
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the keys are not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause severe personal injuries and death.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys
in the ignition. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
tally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
Power Door Lock Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
chime will sound if the key is in the LOCK or ACC
position and a door is open, as a reminder to remove the
key.
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter.
Automatic Door Locks Programming
The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or
disabled as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4
of this manual for details.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, performing
the following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
then back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK
position.
3. Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE:
Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor-
dance with local laws.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4
of this manual for details.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, performing
the following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
then back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK
position.
3. Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the
doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE:
Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
feature in accordance with local laws.
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a child
protection door lock system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the vehicle’s ignition key or alike into
the child lock control and pull it upward.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door.
NOTE:
When the child lock system is engaged, the door
can be opened only by using the outside door handle
even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE:
•
After engaging the child protection door lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
•
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
Child Lock Control
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the vehicle’s ignition key or alike into
the child lock control and pull it downward.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door.
NOTE:
After disengaging the child protection door lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position.
Child Lock Control
Power Window Switches
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
Auto Down Feature
The driver door power window switch, and some model
passenger door power window switches have an auto
down feature. Press the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down automati-
cally.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch
is turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window
switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. For
details, refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories Until
Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Program-
mable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
Auto Up Feature with Anti–Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch
is turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window
switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time is programmable
through. For details, refer to “Delay Power Off to Acces-
sories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
NOTE:
•
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then stop. Remove
the obstacle and use the window switch again to close
the window.
•
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window controls on the passenger
doors. When the switch is pressed, the window controls
on the passenger doors will not illuminate and the
passenger windows will be disabled.
Reset
Any time the vehicle battery is disconnected, or goes
dead, the auto-up function will be disabled. To reactivate
the auto-up feature, perform the following steps after
vehicle power is restored:
1. Pull the window switch up to close window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
Window Lockout Switch
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the Trunk Release Button located on the instru-
ment panel to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The transmission must be in Park before the
switch will operate.
The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by
pressing the trunk button on the Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter two times.
With the ignition ON, the trunk open symbol will display
in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is
open. The odometer display will reappear once the trunk
is closed.
With the key in the lock position or key out, the trunk
open symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Release Button
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
Trunk Emergency Release
The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency
release handle. It is located on the inside of the trunk lid,
near the latch, and is coated so that it glows in a darkened
trunk. Pull on the handle to open the trunk.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and, if so
equipped, side curtain airbags for the driver and passen-
gers seated next to a window. If you will be carrying
children too small for adult-size belts, your seat belts also
can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Emergency Release
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
Lap/Shoulder Belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your body
and can take the forces of a collision the best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one an-
other in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
Pulling Out Lap/Shoulder Belt
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
•
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron-
gest bones will take the force in a collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
Connecting Latch Plate To Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
Removing Slack From Belt
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button
above the webbing to release the anchorage, and then
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up and down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a
collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Airbag Control
Module (refer to information on Airbags in this section).
Like the front airbags, the pretensioners are single use
items. After a collision that is severe enough to deploy
the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced.
Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated
if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10
seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8
km/h).
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
BeltAlert Programming
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be en-
abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
performing the following steps:
NOTE:
DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deacti-
vating the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert).
1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
position except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seat
belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/ RUN position, but
do not start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder
Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step.
NOTE:
You must perform the following steps within 60
seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON/ RUN
position.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON/ RUN position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the
driver’s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds,
ending with the seat belt buckled.
NOTE:
Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while
re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract
the seat belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have success-
fully completed the programming.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti-
vated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE:
When the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert)
is deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue
to illuminate as long as the driver’s seat belt is unbuck-
led.
Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. However, the belt will still retract to remove slack
in the shoulder belt. Use The Automatic Locking Mode
any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Seat belts
that have the Automatic Locking Mode feature have a
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
distinctive label on the webbing. Children 12 years old
and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
here a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the automatic locking mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emer-
gency) locking mode.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
equipped) is in its lowest position, your dealer can
provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender
should be used only if the existing belt is not long
enough. When it is not required, remove the extender,
and store it.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is
worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s airbag is mounted in the center of
the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag is
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove com-
partment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the
airbag covers.
NOTE:
The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity.
Front Airbag Components
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
This vehicle may also be equipped with side curtain
airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next
to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain
airbags, they are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE:
Airbag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim; but they will open to allow airbag deploy-
ment.
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags are no longer functional. These
protective covers for the airbag cushions are de-
signed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• If your vehicle is equipped with side curtain air-
bags, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the location of the side curtain
airbag. The area where the side curtain airbag is
located should remain free from any obstructions.
• If your vehicle is equipped with side curtain air-
bags, do not have any accessory items installed
which will alter the roof, including adding a sun-
roof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into
the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band radios
etc.
Window Airbag
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
proper performance of the curtain airbags.
Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the
instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side Cur-
tain Airbags also work with seat belts to improve occu-
pant protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
If your vehicle is so equipped, the Side Curtain Airbag on
the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to
severe side collisions. However, even in collisions where
the airbags deploy, you need the seat belts to keep you in
the correct position for the airbags to protect you prop-
erly.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and under should ride buckled
up in the rear seat.
2. Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe injury
or death to infants in that position.
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (refer to information on Child Restraint
in this section) should be secured in the rear seat in child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats.
4. Older children who do not use child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buck-
led up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
5. If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint (refer to information on Child Restraint in this
section).
6. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
7. All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
8. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate.
9. If your vehicle has side curtain airbags do not lean
against the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the
space between you and the door.
10. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the ⬙If
You Need Customer Assistance⬙ section in this manual.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
•
If the vehicle has side curtain airbags, they also
need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door
or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
•
Airbag Control Module (ACM)
•
Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (if equipped)
•
Airbag Warning Light
•
Driver Airbag
•
Front Passenger Airbag
•
Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above Side Win-
dows (if equipped)
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Interconnecting Wiring
•
Seatbelt Reminder Light
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Front Acceleration Sensors
•
Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
How The Airbag System Works
•
The Airbag Control Module (ACM) determines if a
frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags
to inflate. The front airbag inflators are designed to
provide different rates of airbag inflation from direc-
tion provided by the ACM. The ACM will not detect
roll over.
•
The ACM also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the knee bolster, the instru-
ment panel, and the steering wheel and column. If the
key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or not
in the ignition, the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
•
The ACM also turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8
seconds as a self-check when the ignition is
first turned on. After the self-check, the
Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the ACM detects
a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the
Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continu-
ously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on
again after initial start up.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not
come on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have the airbag system
checked right away.
•
The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag/Inflator
Units are located in the center of the steering wheel
and the passenger side of the instrument panel. When
the ACM detects a collision requiring the airbags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of nontoxic
gas is generated to inflate the front airbags. Different
airbag inflation rates may be possible based on colli-
sion severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover, and
the upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way, as the bags inflate to
their full size. The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes. The bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. The
driver’s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes
in the sides of the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag
gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the
airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere with
your control of the vehicle.
•
The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbag are de-
signed to activate only in certain side collisions. When
the ACM (with side impact option) detects a collision
requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate, it signals
the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle. Aquantity
of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain
airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the
outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one quarter of the time that it
takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure
you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the side curtain
airbag inflates. This especially applies to children. The
side curtain airbag is only about 3-1/2 inches (9 cm)
thick when it is inflated.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and the front passenger, and position every-
one for the best interaction with the front airbag.
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ACM
detects a moderate-to-severe collision, to help restrain the
driver and front passenger, and then to immediately
deflate.
NOTE:
A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
•
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have been deployed. If you are involved in
another collision, the airbags will not be in place to
protect you.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
WARNING!
Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another colli-
sion. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Enhanced Accident Response Feature
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,
approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped
moving, the interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility.
NOTE:
The interior lights can only be deactivated if the
key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is
driven.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured because the airbags are not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or
the upper passenger side of the instrument panel.
Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or frame.
•
You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
•
The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers
during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned on.
•
The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval.
•
The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an airbag deployment, your vehicle is
designed to record up to 2-seconds of specific vehicle
data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment. Please note
that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
and are otherwise unavailable. In conjunction with other
data gathered during a complete accident investigation,
the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler and
others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes
and associated injuries in order to assess and improve
vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations
initiated by DaimlerChrysler, such investigations may be
requested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insur-
ance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler (regardless of initiative), the company
or its designated representative will first obtain permis-
sion of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle
(usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the
electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data
by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a
warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the
custodial entity upon request. General data that does not
identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for
incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those
maintained by the US government and various states.
Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would
identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be dis-
closed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except
when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a
DaimlerChrysler product
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
•
⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
•
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
•
Seatbelt status
•
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
•
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
•
Engine control status (including engine speed)
•
Cruise control status (if applicable)
•
Traction/stability control status (if applicable)
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time — babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap
could become so great that you could not hold the
child, no matter how strong you are. The child and
others could be badly injured. Any child riding in
your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the
child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child:
Infants and Child Restraints
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and “convertible” child seats.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to
“LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)” in this section.
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child
Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren)” in this section.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seat back, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag, which may cause
severe or fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CH ildren)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail-
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail-
able for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child re-
straint in any vehicle.
All three rear-seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats. You should NEVER install LATCH-
compatible child seats such that two seats share a com-
mon lower anchorage. If installing child seats in adjacent
rear-seating positions, or if your child restraints are not
LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehi-
cle’s seat belts.
LATCH Anchorages
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars,
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seat back, and are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seat back and the rear
window. These tether strap anchorages are
under a plastic cover with this symbol on it.
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
seat cover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage
cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the
child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor-
age, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the
most direct path between the anchor and the child
restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat,
removing slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seat backs as you remove slack in
the strap.
•
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch-
ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder
belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will
keep the belt tight, however, any seat belt system will
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull
it tight if necessary.
Seat belts with an automatic locking retractor have a
distinctive label on the seat belt webbing. The seat belt
must be in the automatic locking mode in order to enable
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
a child restraint to be tightly installed. Refer to “Auto-
matic Locking Mode” in this section for details. A locking
clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking
feature is enabled. Position the shoulder and lap belt on
the child restraint. The automatic locking retractor is
activated by first attaching the child seat, then pulling all
of the webbing out of the retractor, then allowing back in.
Tighten webbing. To release, simply unbuckle the seat
belt by depressing the button, allowing the webbing to
retract into the retractor.
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
Tether Strap Mounting
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to
the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
NOTE:
Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into
the opening between the seat backs as you remove slack
in the strap.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Lock Your Vehicle
Always remove the keys from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended, even in your
own driveway or garage. Try to park your vehicle in a
well-lit area and never invite theft by leaving articles of
value exposed.
Exhaust Gas
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO) which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breath-
ing (CO) follow the safety tips below.
•
If you are required to drive with the trunk open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see you
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors
..............................68
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror .................68
▫ Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror —
If Equipped ..........................68
▫ Outside Mirrors .......................69
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped ..........................69
▫ Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer — If Equipped . .69
▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal & Approach
Lighting — If Equipped ..................70
▫ Tilt In Reverse Feature — If Equipped .......70
▫ Power Remote Control Mirrors .............70
▫ Heated Remote Control Mirrors —
If Equipped ..........................71
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped ....71
䡵 Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) —
If Equipped
...........................72
▫ Operations ...........................73
▫ Phone Call Features ....................79
▫ UConnect™ System Features ..............81
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity .............85
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect™ System .....................86
3
䡵 Seats
................................92
▫ Power Seats ..........................92
▫ Power Reclining Seats ...................93
▫ Lumbar Support .......................94
▫ Head Restraints .......................94
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ..............95
▫ Folding Rear Seat ......................97
䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped
.........98
▫ Programming The Memory Feature .........98
▫ Linking & Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Transmitter To The Memory Feature .........99
▫ Memory Position Recall .................100
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat
(Available With Memory Seat Only) ........100
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood
............101
䡵 Lights
..............................103
▫ Headlight Switch .....................103
▫ Automatic Headlights – If Equipped ........103
▫ Headlights On With Wipers
(Available With Auto Headlights Only) ......104
▫ Smartbeams — If Equipped ..............104
▫ Headlight Time Delay ..................105
▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) .....106
▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................106
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............106
▫ Multi-Function Lever ...................106
▫ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights .....108
▫ Interior Lights .......................108
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers
..........109
▫ Intermittent Wiper System ...............110
▫ Mist Feature .........................110
▫ Windshield Washers ...................110
64 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Headlights On With Wipers
(Available With Auto Headlights Only) ......111
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........111
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................112
䡵 Headlight Washers — If Equipped
.........113
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................114
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
..........115
䡵 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped
..........................116
䡵 Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped
..........117
䡵 Electronic Speed Control
.................118
▫ Electronic Speed Control Operation ........118
▫ To Activate ..........................119
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed ...............119
▫ To Deactivate ........................119
▫ To Resume Speed .....................119
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............120
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...............120
䡵 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) —
If Equipped
..........................121
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . .123
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . .123
▫ To Activate ..........................124
▫ To Set a Desired Speed .................125
▫ To Cancel ...........................126
▫ ToTurnOff .........................126
▫ To Resume Speed .....................126
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............127
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC ......128
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu ......129
▫ Display Warnings & Maintenance ..........132
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC .......134
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 65
3
▫ General Information ...................136
䡵 Rear Park Assist System — If Equipped
.....136
䡵 Overhead Console
.....................140
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights ................140
▫ Sunglasses Storage ....................140
䡵 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威)—
If Equipped
..........................141
▫ Programming HomeLink ................142
▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . .144
▫ Using HomeLink .....................145
▫ Erasing HomeLink Buttons ..............145
▫ Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button . . .145
▫ Security ............................146
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped
............146
▫ Opening Sunroof - Express ..............147
▫ Closing Sunroof - Express ...............147
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ...................147
▫ Pinch Protect Override .................148
▫ Venting Sunroof - Express ...............148
▫ Sunshade Operation ...................148
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................148
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...................148
▫ Ignition Off Operation ..................148
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed ...................149
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets
.................149
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off .......151
䡵 Cup Holders
.........................151
▫ Front Seat Cup Holders — Standard ........151
▫ Front Seat Cup Holders — 300 Touring And
300C Models ........................152
▫ Rear Seat Cup Holders .................152
66 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical mirror adjustment.
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror.
A light in the button will indicate when the dimming
feature is activated.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror
68 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
wipe the mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE:
The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions, full
forward, full rearward, and normal.
Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn this feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the Inside
Rearview Mirror. This feature is also available on the
passenger outside mirror of mirrors equipped with turn
signal and approach lighting.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 69
3
Outside Mirrors with Turn Signal & Approach
Lighting — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
and approach lighting contain four LEDs, which are
located in the upper outer corner of each mirror.
Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash
with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and
rear of the vehicle. Turning on the hazard flashers will
also activate these LEDs.
The fourth (uppermost) LED supplies illuminated entry
lighting, which turns on in both mirrors when you use
the keyless entry transmitter or open any door. This LED
shines outward to illuminate the front and rear door
handles. It also shines downward to illuminate the area
in front of the doors.
The illuminated entry lighting fades to off after about 30
seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
ignition switch is turned ON from the LOCK position.
NOTE:
The approach lighting will not function when
the gear selector lever is moved out of the P (PARK)
position.
Tilt in Reverse Feature — If Equipped
The ⬙Tilt in Reverse⬙ feature tilts the outside rearview
mirrors downward when the ignition switch is in the ON
position and the transmission is in the R (Reverse)
position. This feature provides the driver with a better
view of the ground and vehicle in the area of the rear tires
when backing up. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
R (Reverse).
The ⬙Tilt in Reverse⬙ feature can be enabled or disabled
through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
— if equipped. For details, refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual.
Power Remote Control Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel next to the power door lock switch. A rotary
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror, or off position.
70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your remote keyless entry transmitter
or the memory switch on the driver’s door panel to
return the power mirrors to pre-programmed positions.
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in this section for details.
Heated Remote Control Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature
is activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window
Defrost.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
Power Mirror Control
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 71
3
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial”
ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is trans-
mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect™ system.
NOTE:
The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s micro-
phone for private conversation.
The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names and four numbers per name. Each language has a
separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Blue-
tooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UCon-
nect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system.
The UConnect™ system can be used with any Hands-
Free Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See
www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If
your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g.,
Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UCon-
nect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
system can be adjusted either from the radio volume
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operations
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the voice on beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt
or another prompt.
UConnect™ Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73
3
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one
sitting eight feet away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options are at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ follow-
ing the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will play
all the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say
⬙Cancel⬙ and you will be returned to the main menu.
However, in a few instances the system will take you
back to the previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
NOTE:
The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:
74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing⬙ and follow the audible prompts.
•
When prompted, after the voice on beep, say ⬙Pair a
Phone⬙ and follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number,
which you will later need to enter into your cellular.
You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not
need to remember this pin number after the initial
pairing process.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone
Connectivity⬙).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75
3
Call/Dial by Saying a Number
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
•
System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
•
For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901.⬙
•
The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone num-
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Call/Dial by Saying a Name
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial” or Call.⬙
•
System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phone-
book. Refer to ⬙Add Names to Your UConnect™
Phonebook,⬙ to learn how to store a name in the
phonebook.
•
The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE:
Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and is recom-
mended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙⬙Work,⬙⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE:
Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
3
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE:
Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the ⬙Voice Recognition⬙ button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete, home,
work, mobile, or pager. Say the designation you wish
to delete.
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be de-
leted. Note that only the phonebook in the current
language is deleted.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
•
The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
•
The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the ⬙Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name, and then say ⬙Call.⬙ NOTE: the user can also
exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ operations at this point.
•
The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
call was rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The
UConnect™ system compatible phones in market today
do not support rejecting an incoming call when another
call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either
answer an incoming call or ignore it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
3
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to ⬙Toggling Between Calls.⬙ To combine two calls, refer
to ⬙Conference Call.⬙
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the ⬘Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
⬘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recogni-
tion’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under ⬙Making a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call has
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ⬘Phone’
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Redial
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
•
The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not
be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ sys-
tem.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
•
After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
UConnect™ System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
3
NOTE:
After every UConnect™ language change op-
eration, only the language specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect™ system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is only supported in the USA.
NOTE:
The emergency number dialed is based on the
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USAand
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the cell phone directly.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
UConnect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations when the cell phone has
network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™
system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE:
The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-
528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
city in Mexico).
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” cover-
age details in the Warranty information booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated tele-
phone system.
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voice-
mail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound3746#,youcanpressthe’Voice Recognition’
button and say ⬙3746#Send.⬙ Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send⬙ is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
aѧ,⬙ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
3
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™
system will not repeat a phone number before you dial
it).
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming net-
work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE:
Certain brands of mobile phones do not send
the dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
•
Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute.⬙
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
•
Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute-off.⬙
Information Service
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
number ⬙#121,⬙ you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
related information.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongo-
ing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue-
tooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, then follow the
instruction described in your cellular phone user’s
manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone pairing”.
•
When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
•
The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the ⬘Voice recognition’
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
3
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “de-
lete” a paired phone.
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select.
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UCon-
nect™ system will return to using the highest priority
phone present in or near (approximately with in 30
feet) the vehicle.
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played and then choose
the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
Voice Recognition (VR)
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system, such
as voice mail, or when sending a page at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙send.⬙
•
Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
•
UConnect™ phonebook nametag recognition rate is
optimized for the voice of the person who stored the
name in the phonebook.
•
You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows, and
•
dry weather condition.
•
Operation from driver seat.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
3
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect™ system.
•
Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
Bluetooth Communication Link
Occasionally, Cellular phones have been found to lose
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this hap-
pens, the connection can generally be re-established by
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recom-
mended to remain in Bluetooth ⬙on⬙ mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least
five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
3
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
3
North American English
Primary Alternate(s)
Zero Oh
Add location Add new
All All of them
Confirmation prompts Confirmations prompts
Delete a name Delete
Language Select language
List names List all
List paired phones List phones
Pager Beeper
Phone pairing Pairing
Phonebook Phone book
Return to main menu Return. Main menu
Select phone select
Set up Phone settings phone set
up
SEATS
Power Seats
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat
near the floor. Use this switch to move the driver’s seat
up or down, forward or rearward, or to tilt the seat. The
passenger’s seat will move up or down, forward or
rearward.
Power Seat Switch
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat as it may
cause damage to the seat controls.
Power Reclining Seats
The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the
seat.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Power Seat Recline Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
3
Lumbar Support
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever for-
ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumbar support.
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Adjustable restraints
should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as high as
practical.
The head restraints have a locking button, which must be
pushed in to lower the head restraint. The restraints may
be raised without pushing in the button.
Lumbar Support Control Lever
Adjustable Head Restraint
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats — If Equipped
Heated seats, which are available only with leather
upholstery, provide comfort and warmth on cold days
and can help soothe sore muscles and backs. The heaters
provide the same heat level for both cushion and back.
The controls for the driver and front passenger heated
seats are located near the bottom center of the instrument
panel.
On vehicles equipped with rear heated seats, the seats
closest to the doors are heated. The controls for these
seats are located on the rear of the center console.
After turning on the ignition, you and your passenger(s)
can choose from High, Off, or Low heat settings. Amber
LEDs in the switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two
LEDs will illuminate for high, one for low, and none for
off.
Front Heated Seat Switch
Rear Heated Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
3
Press the switch once to select high-level heating. Press
the switch a second time to select low-level heating. Press
the switch a third time to shut off the heating elements.
If high-level heating is selected, the system will automati-
cally switch to low level after 30 minutes of continuous
operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs
changes from two to one, indicating the change. Opera-
tion on the low setting also turns off automatically after
30 minutes.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods.
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. Pull on the loops shown in the
illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks. These
loops can be tucked away when not in use.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
•
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked
into position the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious in-
jury.
•
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They
could be seriously injured in an accident. Chil-
dren should be seated and using the proper re-
straint system.
Folding Rear Seats
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
3
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals
(if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering
column (if equipped), and a set of desired radio station
presets.
The memory switch is located on the driver’s door panel.
The switch contains an (S) button to activate the memory
save function. It also contains a rocker switch labeled
with the number (1) and the number (2). The rocker
switch allows the driver to recall either of two pre-
programmed memory profiles by pressing the appropri-
ate side of the switch.
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
1. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e. seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column [if
equipped], and radio station presets).
Memory Switch
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Press and release the Set (S) button on the memory
switch, then press the side of the rocker switch labeled (1)
within 5 seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — if equipped will display which memory
position is being set.
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into
memory as follows:
1. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e. seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column [if
equipped], and radio station presets).
2. Press and release the Set (S) button on the memory
switch, then press the side of the rocker switch labeled (2)
within 5 seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — if equipped will display which memory
position is being set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
in Park, but the vehicle must be in Park to recall a
memory profile.
NOTE:
The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock
feature can be enabled through the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. For details,
refer to “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
Linking & Unlinking the Remote Keyless
Transmitter to the Memory Feature
Your Remote Keyless Entry Transmitters can be pro-
grammed to recall one of two pre-programmed memory
profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry Transmitter.
To program your transmitters, perform the following:
1. Remove key from ignition.
2. Select desired memory profile 1 or 2.
3. Press and release the Set (S) button on the memory
switch, then press and release the side of the rocker
switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly. ⬙Memory Profile Set” (1
or 2) will display in the instrument cluster on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
3
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter
within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your transmitters can be unlinked to your
memory settings by pressing the Set (S) button followed
by the UNLOCK button on the transmitter in Step 4
above.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
The vehicle must be in Park to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in Park, a message will display in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
memory button number 1 on the driver’s door or the
“Unlock” button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmit-
ter linked to memory position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
memory button number 2 on the driver’s door or the
“Unlock” button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmit-
ter linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory
buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the drivers door during a recall.
When a recall is cancelled, the driver seat, side mirror,
adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and
telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop moving. A
delay of one second will occur before another recall can
be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat
Only)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
key from the ignition switch.
•
When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm)
rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or
equal to 3.5 inches (90 mm) forward of the rear stop.
The seat will return to its previously set position when
you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it
out of the LOCK position.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
the driver seat will move to a position 1.2 inches (30
mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position
is between 2.4 inches and 3.5 inches (60 mm and 90
mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its
previously set position when you insert the key into
the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK
position.
•
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 2.4 inches (60 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be en-
abled or disabled through the programmable features in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). For
details, refer to “Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit,”
under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Fea-
tures),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood. First, pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
3
Next, move to the outside of the vehicle and push the
safety catch to the left. The safety catch is located under
the center front edge of the hood.
Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in
the open position.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood, until it is open approximately 6
inches (15 cm), and then drop it. This should secure both
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
Hood Safety Catch
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instru-
ment panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, inte-
rior lights, and fog lights.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Turn it to the second detent for headlight, parking light,
and instrument panel light operation.
Automatic Headlights – If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights ON or
OFF according to ambient light levels. To turn the system
ON, rotate the headlight switch counter-clockwise to the
AUTO (A) position. When the system is ON, the Head-
light Time Delay feature is also ON. This means the
headlights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you
turn the ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic
System OFF, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
(A) position.
Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
3
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come ON in the Automatic mode.
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on
or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped. For details, refer to ”Headlights
On with Wipers,” under “Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center” in Section 4 of this manual.
SmartBeams — If Equipped
The SmartBeam system provides increased forward light-
ing at night by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside
rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light
and automatically switches from high beams to low
beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
To Activate:
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). For details,
refer to “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter” in Section 4 of this manual.
2. Rotate the headlight switch counter-clockwise to the
AUTO (A) position.
Headlight Switch
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push the Multi-Function Lever away from you to
switch the headlights to the HIGH BEAM position.
NOTE:
This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 25 mph (40 km/h).
To Deactivate:
Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the
SmartBeam system.
1. Pull the Multi-Function Lever toward you to switch
the headlights from the HIGH BEAM to the LOW BEAM
position.
2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO
(A) to the ON position.
NOTE:
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield
or camera lens will cause the system to function improp-
erly.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your ve-
hicle in an unlighted area.
To activate the delay feature, turn off the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when headlight switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights, park lights, or ignition switch
on again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of turning the ignition off to activate this feature
The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). For details, refer to “Delay Turning Headlights
Off,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
3
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)
The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime
Running Lights, whenever the ignition switch is on, the
headlights are off, and the parking brake is off. The
headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
driving.
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is on the headlight
switch below the dimmer control. To activate the
front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the
low beam headlights and press the fog light switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multi-Function Lever
The multi-function lever controls the operation of the
turn signals, headlight beam selection, and passing
lights. The lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
Multi-Function Lever
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Move the Multi-Function Lever up or down and the
corresponding turn signal indicator in the instrument
cluster flashes to show proper operation of the front and
rear turn signal lights.
Moving the Multi-Function Lever up or down also causes
the corresponding turn signal indicator in the outside
mirror (if so equipped) to flash. For details, refer to
“Outside Mirrors with Turn Signal & Approach Light-
ing” under “Mirrors” in this section.
You can also signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.
Releasing the lever at the detent will provide 3 flashes.
If either light has a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light
when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the fuse
or indicator is defective or there may be a circuit failure.
NOTE:
A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if
equipped and a continuous chime will sound if the
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
Push the Multi-Function Lever away from you to switch
the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever towards
you to switch the headlights back to LOW beam.
Flash to Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the Multi-Function Lever toward you.
This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam
and remain on until the lever is released.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
3
Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned ON by pressing
the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn OFF the
light. These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or
when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open. This includes the glove box light,
but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation,
either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light
switch.
Dimmer Control
The dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch, and is located on the
left side of the instrument panel. With
the parking lights or headlights on,
rotating the dimmer control upward
will increase the brightness of the in-
strument panel lights.
Overhead Console
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom “OFF”
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
— if equipped, and radio when the parking lights or
headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multi-function lever operates the windshield
wipers and washer when the ignition switch is in
the ON position. The lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Rotate the end of the multi-function lever to the first
detent past the intermittent settings for Low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for High-speed wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
3
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is
left in any position other than OFF.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multi-
function lever to the first detent position, and then turn
the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval.
There are six delay settings, which allow you to regulate
the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every
second to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds
between cycles.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during wind-
shield washer use.
Mist Feature
Push the multi-function lever inward (toward the steer-
ing column) to the first detent to activate a single wipe
cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing
vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate until you
release the lever.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multi-function lever inward
(toward the steering column) to the second detent and
hold it for as long as washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned OFF, the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles
and then turn OFF.
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on
or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped. For details, refer to ”Headlights
On with Wipers,” under “Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center” in Section 4 of this manual.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multi-function lever to one of the six
intermittent wiper settings to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
multi-function lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive and wiper delay position 6 is the most sensitive.
Choose setting 3 or 4 for normal rain conditions. Choose
setting 2 or 1 if you desire less wiper sensitivity. Choose
setting 5 or 6 if you desire more sensitivity. Place the lever
in the OFF position when not using the system.
NOTE:
•
The rain-sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper speed is in the LOW or HIGH position.
•
The rain-sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
3
•
Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
•
The Rain Sense feature can be turned on and off
through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped. For details, refer to “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4 of this manual.
The rain sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
•
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The rain-sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the
outside temperature is below 32° F (0° C), unless the
wiper control on the multi-function lever is moved, or
the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0
km/h), or the outside temperature rises above freez-
ing.
•
Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The rain-sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is ON, and the trans-
mission shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position, and
the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless
the wiper control on the multi-function lever is moved
or the shift lever is moved out of the N (Neutral)
position.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of
the vehicle. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of
washer fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid”
appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
HEADLIGHT WASHERS — IF EQUIPPED
The multi-function lever operates the headlight washers
when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the
headlights are ON. The multi-function lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
To use the headlight washers, push the multi-function
lever inward (toward the steering column) to the second
detent and release it. The headlight washers will spray a
timed high-pressure spray of washer fluid onto each
headlight lens. In addition, the windshield washers will
spray the windshield and the windshield wipers will
cycle.
Washer Fluid Reservoir
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
3
NOTE:
The headlight washers will operate on the first
spray of the windshield washer and then every fourth
spray after that.
Adding Washer Fluid
The headlight washer and windshield washer share the
same fluid reservoir. The reservoir is located in the front
of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the
vehicle. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Headlight Washer
Washer Fluid Reservoir
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
outward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle inward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The
telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or
driving without the telescoping adjustment locked
could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
3
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multi-function
lever on the steering column.
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your remote keyless entry transmitter
or the memory switch on the driver’s door panel to
return the tilt/telescopic steering column to pre-
programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section for details.
WARNING!
Moving the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows both the brake and
accelerator pedal to move toward or away from the
driver to provide improved position with the steering
wheel. The switch is located on the front side of the
driver’s seat cushion side shield.
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
•
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
•
The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
•
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R
(Reverse) or when the Speed Control is ON. One of the
following messages will display in the Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped if a
pedal adjustment is attempted when the system is
locked out: “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise
Control Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled —
Vehicle In Reverse.”
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your remote keyless entry transmitter
or the memory switch on the driver’s door panel to
return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed posi-
tions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in this section for
details.
Adjustable Pedal Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
3
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become
limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in
the adjustable pedal’s path.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
Electronic Speed Control Operation
The speed control lever (located on the left side of the
steering column) operates the system.
1 — RESUME/ACCEL
2 — SET/DECEL
3 — CANCEL
4 — ON/OFF
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Activate:
Push the speed control lever inward (toward
the steering column) and release (“ON/OFF”).
The indicator light in the lever (and in the
instrument cluster on some models) will illu-
minate to show that the speed control system is ON. To
turn the system OFF, push the lever inward (toward the
steering column) again and release. At this time, the
system and the indicator light will turn off.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you aren’t using it.
To Set At A Desired Speed:
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
lever down and release (“SET/DECEL”). Remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
•
Speed control will only function in third, fourth, or
fifth gear when in the Autostick威 Mode (if equipped).
•
The speed control may not engage if a different size
tire is installed on one wheel, such as the compact
spare tire.
To Deactivate:
The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the memory if you:
•
Softly tap the brake pedal.
•
Depress the brake pedal.
•
Push the speed control lever away from you (“CAN-
CEL”).
Pushing and releasing the lever (“ON/OFF”) or turning
off the ignition erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed:
If you deactivated the speed control without erasing the
set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h) you can resume the previous set
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
3
speed. To do so, push the lever up and release (RES/
ACCEL), and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
To Vary the Speed Setting:
When the speed control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the lever up and holding (“RES/ACCEL”).
When the lever is released, a new set speed will be
established.
Pushing the lever up and releasing (“RES/ACCEL”) once
will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed increase. Each
time the lever is pushed up and released, speed increases
so that pushing the lever up and releasing three times
will increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while speed control is set, push the
lever down and hold (“SET/DECEL”). Release the lever
when the desired speed is reached, and a new set speed
will be established.
Pushing down and releasing the lever (“SET/DECEL”)
once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed decrease.
Each time the lever is pushed down and released, speed
decreases.
To Accelerate For Passing:
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE:
The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
Four speed automatic transmissions will experience a
downshift to 3rd gear while climbing uphill or descend-
ing downhill. This downshift to 3rd gear is necessary to
maintain vehicle set speed.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes an infrared
sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead in your
path within a distance of 328 ft (100 m).
NOTE:
•
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle directly ahead of
you, ACC will function in the same way as standard
cruise control system. For additional information, refer
to “Electronic Speed Control” in this section.
•
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration automatically so
that your vehicle maintains a preset following dis-
tance.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
3
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is
not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and
weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your com-
plete attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings
can result in an accident or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
− Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and station-
ary objects (i.e. a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled
vehicle).
− Does not predict the lane curvature or the movement of
preceding vehicles and will not compensate for such changes.
− Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account,
and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions.
− Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions,
which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings.
− May not detect a vehicle ahead when strong light (for example,
sunrise or sunset) is directly shining on the front of the vehicle.
− Can only apply a maximum of 25% of the vehicle’s braking
capability, and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
WARNING!
You should switch off the ACC system:
•
When driving in fog; heavy rain; heavy snow;
sleet; heavy traffic; and complex driving situa-
tions (i.e. in highway construction zones).
•
When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or
downhill slopes; and when towing a trailer.
•
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in an
accident or serious personal injury.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control lever (located on the left side of the
steering column) operates the ACC system.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is between
25 mph and 100 mph (Canada 30 km/h and 180 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) dis-
plays “ACC READY.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “ACC OFF.”
NOTE:
You cannot enable ACC under the following
conditions:
•
When you apply the brakes.
•
When the parking brake is set.
•
When the automatic transmission is in P (Park), R
(Reverse), or N (Neutral).
•
When the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is
switched off.
•
When pressing the RES/ACCEL switch without a
previously set speed in memory.
1 — RESUME/ACCEL
2 — SET/DECEL
3 — CANCEL
4 — DISTANCE SETTING
5 — ON/OFF
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
3
To Activate:
Push the speed control lever inward (toward the steering
column) and release (“ON/OFF”). The ACC menu in the
EVIC displays “ACC READY.”
To turn the system OFF, push the lever inward (toward
the steering column) again and release. At this time, the
system will turn off and the EVIC will display “ACC
OFF.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could acciden-
tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have an accident.
Always leave the system OFF when you aren’t using
it.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Set a Desired Speed:
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
lever down and release (“SET/DECEL”). The EVIC will
display the set speed.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
•
The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
•
The system will not be controlling the distance be-
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
•
The vehicle speed will only be determined by the
position of the accelerator pedal.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
3
To Cancel:
The system will disable ACC without erasing the
memory if:
•
You softly tap the brake pedal.
•
You depress the brake pedal.
•
You push the speed control lever away from you
(“CANCEL”).
•
If ESP/TCS activates.
To Turn Off:
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
•
You push and release the lever (“ON/OFF”).
•
You turn off the ignition.
•
You switch off ESP.
To Resume Speed:
Push the lever up and release (“RES/ACCEL”), and then
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC
will display the last set speed.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate to sharply for safe operation. This
could cause an accident and/or serious injury.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Vary the Speed Setting:
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by lifting
and holding the lever up (“RES/ACCEL”). If the lever is
continually held, the set speed will continue to increase
in 5 mph (Canada 10 km/h) increments until the lever is
released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC
display.
Lifting the lever up and releasing once will result in a 1
mph (Canada 1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each sub-
sequent lift and release of the lever results in an increase
of 1 mph (Canada 1 km/h).
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the lever down and holding (“SET/DECEL”). If
the lever is continually held, the set speed will continue
to decrease in 5 mph (Canada 10 km/h) increments until
the lever is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC display.
Pushing the lever down and releasing once will result in
a 1 mph (Canada 1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent push and release of the lever results in a
decrease of 1 mph (Canada 1 km/h).
NOTE:
•
When you use the lever to decelerate, if the engine’s
braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to
reach the set speed, the brake system will automati-
cally slow the vehicle.
•
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
3
Setting the Following Distance in ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between long, medium, and
short. Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed,
ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead.
This distance setting displays in the EVIC.
You can change the distance setting by pulling the lever
toward you and release (“DISTANCE”). Each time this is
done, the distance setting toggles between long, medium,
and short.
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indi-
cator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto-
matically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of
the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
•
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
•
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
•
The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 18 mph (26
km/h) and the system automatically disables itself.
•
The distance setting is changed.
•
The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
1 — Sensor Bars. Default Distance Setting is Three Bars = Long.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
(“ATTENTION”) will flash in the EVIC and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum
braking capacity. When this occurs, you should immedi-
ately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe
distance from the vehicle ahead.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument
cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
Press the Menu button (located on the steering
wheel) repeatedly until one of the following
displays in the EVIC:
Menu
Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
3
ACC OFF
−
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “ACC
OFF.”
ACC READY
−
When ACC is activated, the display will read “ACC
READY.”
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ACC SET
−
When ACC is set, the set speed will display.
The set speed will continue to display in place of the
odometer reading when changing the EVIC display
while ACC is set.
The ACC SET screen will display once again if any
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the
following:
•
Set speed change
•
Distance setting change
•
System cancel
•
Acquisition/loss of Target
•
Driver override
1 — Sensed Vehicle Indicator
2 — Set Speed
3 — Your Vehicle
4 — Following Distance Setting: Three Bars = Long; Two Bars =
Medium; One Bar = Short.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
3
•
System off
•
Proximity warning
•
ACC unavailable/service ACC warning
The EVIC will return to the last display selected
after 5 seconds of no ACC activity.
Display Warnings & Maintenance
ACC Unavailable Warning
The ACC Unavailable Warning will display when condi-
tions temporarily limit system performance. This most
often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow,
fog, heavy rain, or when driving into direct sunlight
(sunrise or sunset). The ACC system may also become
temporarily unavailable due to obstructions, such as dirt
or ice. In these cases, the EVIC will display “ACC
UNAVAILABLE.”
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located behind the grille,
slightly offset from the center of the grille.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-
tant to note the following maintenance items:
•
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
•
Do not remove any screws from the sensor or the
sensor mount. Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor re-
alignment.
•
If the sensor is damaged due to an accident, see your
authorized dealer for service.
•
Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “ACC Off”
state and will resume function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
Installing a vehicle front-end protector or an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC
operation.
Service ACC Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “SERVICE
ACC,” it indicates there is an internal system fault that
requires service from an authorized dealer.
ACC Sensor Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
3
Precautions While Driving with ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel. There will not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle
may move in and out of the line of travel, which can
cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Turns and Bends
In turns or bends, ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too
late or too early. This may cause your vehicle to brake late
or unexpectedly. Give extra attention in curves and be
ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Be sure to select an
appropriate speed while driving in curves.
ACC may occasionally provide braking and/or a driver
alert that you consider unnecessary. This may be the
system’s response to signs, guardrails, and other station-
ary objects in a curve. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Changing
ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are travelling. In the illustration
shown, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing
lanes, and it will not until it may be too late to take action.
ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane. There will not be sufficient distance to the lane-
changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply
the brakes if necessary.
Using ACC on Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
3
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There will not be suffi-
cient distance to the vehicle ahead.
General Information
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
Classification Specifications:
DIN EN 60825-1:2003
IEC 60825-1:2001
REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear ParkAssist System is a driver aid that senses for
obstacles behind the vehicle. Refer to the Warnings,
Cautions, and Notes in this section for system limitations
and usage recommendations.
The Rear Park Assist System is active when the driver
shifts the transmission into the R (Reverse) position, and
the parking brake is not applied, and the vehicle speed is
less than 10 mph (16 km/h).
The system can be turned on or off when the vehicle is in
PARK through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped. For details, refer to “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Sec-
tion 4 of this manual.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system uses four sensors located in the rear bumper
to scan for obstacles up to 59 inches (150 cm) away from
the rear bumper fascia. The warning display located
above the rear window provides both visible and audible
warnings to indicate the range of the object.
The warning display contains two sets of yellow and red
LEDs, one set to warn of obstacles behind the left rear of
the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles behind
the right rear of the vehicle. The driver can view the LEDs
either through the rear view mirror or by looking at the
display above the rear window.
The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow
LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles. The
following chart shows the warning display operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Rear Park Assist Indicator
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
3
WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM: LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL
REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER
1st LED 59 in. (150 cm) Yellow None
2nd LED 47 in. (120 cm) Yellow None
3rd LED 39 in. (100 cm) Yellow None
4th LED 31.5 in. (80 cm) 31.5 in. (80 cm) Yellow None
5th LED 25.5 in. (65 cm) 25.5 in. (65 cm) Yellow None
6th LED 20 in. (50 cm) 20 in. (50 cm) Yellow None
7th LED 16 in. (40 cm) 16 in. (40 cm) Red at 12 in. (30 cm) In-
termittent
8th LED 6 in. (15 cm) 12 in. (30 cm) Red at 8 in. (20 cm) Con-
tinuous
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE the
radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Rear Park Assist System. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots be-
fore backing up. You are responsible for safety
and must continue to pay attention to your sur-
roundings. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
•
Before using the Rear Park Assist System, it is
strongly recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the
vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to
vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
when the warning display turns the red LEDs ON.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
The Rear Park Assist System is only a parking aid
and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, in-
cluding small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all. Ob-
stacles located above or below the sensors will not
be detected when they are in close proximity.
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
Rear Park Assist System to be able to stop in time
when the obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using the Rear Park Assist System.
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris
to keep the system operating properly.
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
3
If “Service Park Assist System” appears in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) after making sure the
rear bumper is clean please see your authorized dealer.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,
an optional universal garage door opener (HomeLink威),
storage for sunglasses, and an optional power sunroof
switch.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
reading lights.
Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time
to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully
upward, past the second detent.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push the finger depression on the overhead console to
open. Push the finger depression to close.
Overhead Console
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HomeLink姞)—IF
EQUIPPED
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that oper-
ate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
are needed.
NOTE:
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is dis-
abled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
For additional information on HomeLink威, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
WARNING!
• A moving garage door can cause injury to people
and pets in the path of the door. People or pets
could be seriously or fatally injured. Only use this
transceiver with a garage door opener that has a
“stop and reverse” feature as required by federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features it could cause injury or death. Call toll-
free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.homelink.com for safety information or as-
sistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate
can cause serious injury or death to people and
pets or damage to objects.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
3
Programming HomeLink
NOTE:
When programming a garage door opener, it is
advised to park outside the garage. It is also recom-
mended that you install a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed. This will
allow for quicker training and accurate transmission of
the radio-frequency signal.
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display, which includes
HomeLink system messages. The EVIC is located in the
upper part of the cluster between the speedometer and
tachometer.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons.
Release the buttons only when the EVIC displays “Chan-
nels Cleared” (after 20 seconds); however, do not hold
the buttons for longer than 30 seconds. Do not repeat this
step if programming a second or third hand-held trans-
mitter to the remaining HomeLink buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3
inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons.
3. Simultaneously press and hold the HomeLink button
(that you want to train) and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4 is
complete.
NOTE:
Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with
procedures noted under ⬙Gate Operator/Canadian Pro-
gramming.⬙
4. The EVIC will display “Channel X Training” (where X
is Channel 1, 2, or 3). Release both buttons after the EVIC
displays “Channel X Trained.”
NOTE:
If the EVIC displays “Did Not Train,” repeat
Steps 2–4.
5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and
observe the EVIC display. If the EVIC displays “Channel
X Transmit” (where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3), then
programming is complete, and your device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.
NOTE:
To program the remaining two HomeLink but-
tons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ Step 2. Do not repeat
Step 1.
HomeLink Buttons
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
3
NOTE:
If your garage door opener fails to respond to
the programmed HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver, and
your garage door opener is manufactured after 1995, it
may have a multiple security code system (rolling code
system). Please proceed to Steps 6–8 to complete the
programming of a rolling code equipped device (most
common garage door openers require this step.
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)
in the garage, locate the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button. This
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button.
(The name and color of the button may vary by manu-
facturer.)
NOTE:
You will have 30 seconds in which to initiate
Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two
seconds, and release the programmed HomeLink button.
Repeat the ⴖpress/hold/releaseⴖ sequence a second time,
and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener
(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code
equipped device.
NOTE:
To program the remaining two HomeLink but-
tons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ Step 2. Do not repeat
Step 1. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to ⬙time-out⬙ (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to ⬙time-out⬙ in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
programming a gate operator by using the ⬙Program-
ming⬙ procedures (regardless of where you live), replace
ⴖProgramming HomeLinkⴖ Step 3 with the following:
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the
⬙cycling⬙ process to prevent possible overheating.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release your hand-held transmitter
every two seconds until the frequency signal is accepted
successfully by HomeLink. The EVIC will display “Chan-
nel X Trained” (where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3). Proceed
with ⬙Programming⬙ Step 4 to complete the procedure.
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time. In the event that
there are still programming difficulties or questions,
contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-
3515.
Erasing HomeLink Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual
buttons cannot be erased but can be ⬙reprogrammed⬙ -
note below), follow the step noted:
•
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons.
Release the buttons only when the EVIC displays
“Channels Cleared” (after 20 seconds); however, do
not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode and
can be programmed at any time beginning with ⬙Pro-
gramming⬙ Step 2.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button
To program a device a previously trained HomeLink
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The EVIC will display “Channel X Transmit” (where X
is Channel 1, 2, or 3) for 20 seconds and then change to
“Channel X Training.” Without releasing the HomeLink
button, proceed with ⬙Programming⬙ Step 2.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
3
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Security
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies
by following the “Erasing HomeLink Buttons” instruc-
tions in this section.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
HomeLink威 is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Controls
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
•
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof - Express
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and then stop automatically. This is called
Express Open. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof - Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
3
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the closed position.
NOTE:
Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof - Express
Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent,
which operates regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch
is turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. For
details, refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories Until
Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Program-
mable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12-volt electrical outlets on this vehicle.
Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse.
The 12-volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray (if
equipped with an optional Smoker’s Package) has power
available only when the ignition is on. This outlet will
also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit.
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicles not equipped with the
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury
could result.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
3
NOTE:
If desired, the power outlet next to the ash
receiver tray (if equipped) can be converted by your
authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition
switch in the LOCK position.
The center console outlet is powered directly from the
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent
engine starting.
Front Power Outlet Center Console Power Outlet
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.); will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered by
your warranty.
CUP HOLDERS
Front Seat Cup Holders — Standard
The cup holders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
Front Seat Cup Holders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
3
Front Seat Cup Holders — 300 Touring and 300C
Models
The cup holders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
Push down on the cover as shown to expose the cup
holders. Close the cover when the cup holders are no
longer needed.
Rear Seat Cup Holders
The rear seat cup holders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cup holders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants’ el-
bows.
Front Seat Cup Holders
Rear Seat Cup Holders
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Console Features
The center console contains a large storage bin. The
storage bin contains a four-slot coin holder (designed to
hold various size coins) and a rubber mat at the bottom of
the bin for noise control. The bin is large enough to hold
a portable AC/DC converter to power laptops, games, or
other electrical equipment. Two slots at the top right side
of the bin provide clearance for power cords to pass
conveniently out of the bin with the lid closed. This
feature is ideal for games, laptops, cell phones, or other
electrical equipment. The console’s front-opening lid
allows for easy access to the storage bin for the both the
driver and the front passenger. The inside portion of the
arm rest lid contains a penholder, a tissue holder, and a
tire gauge holder.
In addition to the internal storage, the console contains
two shift bezel cubby bins with rubber mats for holding
small items. For vehicles not equipped with navigation
radio, the console also contains an extra storage bin
located below the climate control, which holds up to four
CD jewel cases.
Cargo Area
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
3
WARNING!
•
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked
into position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious in-
jury.
•
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They
could be seriously injured in an accident. Chil-
dren should be seated and using the proper re-
straint system.
•
To help protect against personal injury, passen-
gers should not be seated in the rear cargo area.
The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
WARNING!
•
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and
vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control result-
ing in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
•
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
•
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
•
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide a level-
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel And Controls
............160
䡵 Base Instrument Cluster
.................161
䡵 Premium Instrument Cluster
..............162
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions
...........163
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped
..........................171
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays ............................173
▫ Trip Functions .......................175
▫ Compass Display .....................178
▫ Telephone — If Equipped ...............180
▫ Navigation — If Equipped ...............182
▫ Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features) ...........................182
䡵 Setting The Analog Clock
................186
䡵 Radio General Information
...............187
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals .................187
▫ Two Types Of Signals ..................187
▫ Electrical Disturbances ..................187
▫ AM Reception .......................187
▫ FM Reception ........................187
䡵 Sales Code REF — AM/FM/CD (Single Disc)
Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And
Hands Free Phone Capability
.............188
4
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode .......188
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode .........191
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .....193
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone —
If Equipped .........................194
▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If
Equipped ...........................194
䡵 Sales Code RAK – AM/FM/Cassette/CD
(6-Disc) Radio With Optional Satellite Radio,
Hands Free Phone, Video, MP3, And WMA
Capabilities
..........................195
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode .......195
▫ Operating Instructions — Tape Player .......198
▫ Seek Button .........................199
▫ Fast Forward (FF) .....................199
▫ Rewind (RW) ........................199
▫ Tape Eject ...........................199
▫ Scan Button .........................199
▫ Changing Tape Direction ................199
▫ Metal Tape Selection ...................199
▫ Pinch Roller Release ...................199
▫ Noise Reduction ......................200
▫ Operation Instructions -
(CD Mode For CD Audio Play) ...........200
▫ Load/Eject Button
(CD Mode For CD Audio Play) ...........201
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files .............202
▫ Operation Instructions -
(CD Mode For MP3 And WMA Audio Play) . .204
▫ Load/Eject Button
(CD Mode For MP3 And WMA Play) .......204
䡵 Sales Code REC — AM/FM/CD (6–Disc)
Radio With Navigation System
............206
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
(If Equipped) ........................207
▫ REC Setting The Clock .................207
▫ Audio Clock Display ...................209
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Video Entertainment System (Sales Code XRV) —
If Equipped
..........................210
䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped
.............212
▫ System Activation .....................212
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID) ....................212
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In REF, RAQ, And RAK
Radios .............................213
▫ Selecting a Channel ....................213
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels ......214
▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button
(If Equipped) ........................214
▫ PTY Button ⬙Scan⬙ .....................214
▫ PTY Button ⬙Seek⬙ .....................214
▫ Satellite Antenna ......................214
▫ Reception Quality .....................215
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls —
If Equipped
..........................215
▫ Radio Operation ......................216
▫ Tape Player Operation ..................217
▫ CD Player Operation ...................217
▫ Satellite Radio Operation ................217
䡵 Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance
......217
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance
..............218
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones
.......219
䡵 Climate Controls
......................219
▫ Manual Air Conditioning And Heating
System .............................219
▫ Automatic Temperature Control —
If Equipped .........................221
▫ Operating Tips .......................226
䡵 Rear Window Features
..................229
▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster ...........229
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
4
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
1 — Air Outlet 7 — Radio 13 — Ignition Switch
2 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Climate Control 14 — Hood Release
3 — Hazard Switch 9 — Heated Seat Switch* 15 — Trunk Release Switch
4 — Analog Clock 10 — Power Outlet 16 — Headlight Switch
5 — Electronic Stability Program Off Button*
/ Traction Control System Off Button*
11 — Ash Tray* * If Equipped
6 — Glove Box 12 — Storage Compartment*
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
4
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Electronic Speed Control/Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control or ACC is ON. (See page 118
for more information.) (See page 121 for
more information.)
2. Low Fuel Indicator Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank. (See
page 293 for more information.)
3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the front fog lights
are ON. (See page 106 for more information.)
4. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal
on.
NOTE:
Check for a defective outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate. (See page 107 for more
information.)
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display
This display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions
exist. (See page 171 for more information.) (only on
vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted
switches).
NOTE:
On non-EVIC equipped vehicles, the odometer
is located here.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
4
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odom-
eter reset button to turn off the message. If the problem
continues, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
(See page 332 for more information.)
7. Tachometer
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
engine revolutions-per-minute (r.p.m. x 1000) for each
gear range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the
red area.
8. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound to warn of an overheated engine condi-
tion. When this light turns on, the engine tem-
perature is critically hot. The vehicle should be turned
off immediately and serviced as soon as possible. (See
page 312 for more information.)
9. Anti-Lock Brake Light — If Equipped
This light monitors theAnti-Lock Brake System.
The light will turn on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as
long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required. However, the con-
ventional brake system will continue to operate normally
if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer. (See page 253 for
more information.)
10. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake
Assist System (BAS) Malfunction Indicator Light
The yellow ESP/BAS malfunction indicator
light will turn on when the key in the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion. The light should go out with the engine
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
running. The system will turn this light on continu-
ously while the engine running if it detects a malfunc-
tion in either the ESP or the BAS or both. (See page 259
for more information.)
11. Airbag Warning Light
This light will turn on for 6 to 8 seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is either not on
during starting, or stays on, or turns on
while driving, then have the system inspected at your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. (See page 49 for
more information.)
12. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking
brake application. If the brake light turns on,
it may indicate that the parking brake is
applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there
is a problem with the anti-lock brake system (if
equipped).
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity to a portion of the hydraulic system in the event of a
failure. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder drops
below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers due to a change in fluid level. If so,
the vehicle should have service performed and the brake
fluid level checked.
Immediate repair is necessary if brake failure is indicated.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
Both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light will
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
4
turn on in the event of an EBD failure. Immediate repair
of the ABS system is required in the event of an EBD
failure.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON position. The light should turn on for approxi-
mately two seconds and then turn off. The light will
remain on if the parking brake is applied or if a brake
fault is detected. If the parking brake is not applied and
the light remains on, or if the light does not turn on, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
The light will turn on when the ignition switch
in the ON position and the parking brake is applied. This
light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does
not show the degree of brake application. (See page 253
for more information.)
13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Traction
Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
little throttle as possible. Adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road condi-
tions, and do not switch off the ESP or TCS — if
equipped. (See page 257 for more information.) (See
page 259 for more information.)
14. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads (H),
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately, and call for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow
the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure
Cap paragraph.
15. Trip Odometer Button
Trip Odometer Button — Base Cluster
The word ⬙TRIP⬙ will appear when this button is pressed.
Push in and hold the button for two seconds when the
trip odometer displays to reset it to 0 miles (kilometers).
A second press of the button will display the outside
temperature in the odometer.
Trip Odometer Button — Premium Cluster
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B”
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles (kilometers). The odometer must be in trip
mode to reset it.
16. High Beam Light
This light will turn on when the high beam
headlights are ON. Push the Multi-Function
lever away from the steering wheel to switch the
headlights to high beam. (See page 106 for more
information.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
4
17. Transmission Range Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
gear selection.
18. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. A chime will sound if the driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The Seat
Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continu-
ously if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after
the bulb check or when driving. (See page 38 for more
information.)
19. Vehicle Security Alarm (VSA) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The VSA indicator Light flashes rapidly when the VSA is
arming, and slowly when the VSA is armed. (See page 15
for more information.)
20. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
21. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is turned ON. This
light will also turn on while the engine is
running if there is a problem with the Elec-
tronic Throttle Control system.
If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely
bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible,
place the gear selector in park, and cycle the ignition key.
The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the
engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable.
However, see your dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. In this case, you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.
Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if
the light does not come on during starting.
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires are significantly under-inflated. Ac-
cordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more tire pressures is low. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and
off for 60 seconds when a system fault is detected. The
flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault
condition is removed and reset. (See page 281 for more
information.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
4
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
23. Voltage Light
This light monitors the electrical system volt-
age. The light should turn on momentarily as
the engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on
while driving, it indicates a problem with the charging
system. Immediate service should be obtained.
24. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic
system called OBD. The OBD system monitors
engine and automatic transmission control sys-
tems. The light will turn on when the key is in the ON
position before engine start. If the light does not come
on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs. (See
page 332 for more information.)
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
25. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light shows low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the
engine is started. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle, and shut off the engine as soon as
possible. A single chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure
shown in section 7. (See page 335 for more information.)
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display. It is located in the
upper part of the cluster between the speedometer and
tachometer. Vehicles equipped with steering wheel
mounted buttons (described in this section) are also
equipped with the EVIC. The EVIC consists of the
following:
•
System Status
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
4
•
Vehicle information warning message displays
•
Tire Pressure Monitor System (if equipped)
•
Personal Settings (customer programmable features)
•
Compass display
•
Outside temperature display
•
Trip computer functions
•
UConnect™ hands-free communication system dis-
plays (if equipped)
•
Navigation system screens (if equipped)
•
Audio mode display
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between Trip
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System
Status, Personal Settings, and Telephone (if
equipped).
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept
a selection. The FUNCTION SELECT button
also advances the radio to the next preset
station, changes the side of the tape being
played (if so equipped), or changes the current
CD track being played (if so equipped) when
the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/Audio
screen.
Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System
Status Messages, and Personal Settings (Cus-
tomer Programmable Features). The SCROLL
button also seeks up and down the radio
stations, CD track numbers (if so equipped), or
satellite radio channels (if so equipped) when the EVIC is
in the Compass/Temp/Audio screen.
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. This screen
displays radio station frequencies, any one of
twelve radio station preset frequencies, CD
disc number, CD track number, tape, or any
one of 200 Satellite radio channels depending
on which radio is in the vehicle.
MENU
Button
FUNC-
TION
SELECT
Button
SCROLL
Button
AUDIO
MODE
Button
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If Compass/Temp/Audio is already displayed when the
AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the radio mode
will change from AM to FM, to Tape, to CD, or to Satellite
(SAT) accordingly.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages:
•
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with
either turn signal on)
•
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
•
Memory #1/#2 Profile Set
•
Memory #1/#2 Profile Recall
•
Memory System Disabled – Vehicle Not In Park (with
a single chime)
•
Memory System Disabled – Seat Belt Buckled (with a
single chime)
•
Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park
•
Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/h])
•
Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/h])
•
Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
•
Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
•
Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
•
ACC Off — When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system is turned off. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC)” in Section 3 of this manual for detailed
information (if so equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
4
•
ACC Ready — When the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system is activated. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in Section 3 of this manual for detailed
information (if so equipped).
•
ACC Set — After setting the desired speed in the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in Section 3 of this
manual for detailed information (if so equipped).
•
Driver Override — If you apply the accelerator after
setting the desired speed in the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in Section 3 of this manual for detailed
information (if so equipped).
•
Distance Set — After changing the desired following
distance in theAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system,
this message will display momentarily. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in Section 3 of this
manual for detailed information (if so equipped).
•
Attention — If the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance, this message
will flash and a chime will sound while ACC continues
to apply its maximum braking capacity. When this
occurs, you should immediately apply the brakes as
needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle
ahead. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
Section 3 of this manual for detailed information (if so
equipped).
•
ACC Unavailable — If the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system deactivates due to performance limiting
conditions. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)”
in Section 3 of this manual for detailed information (if
so equipped).
•
Service ACC — If the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system turns off due to an internal system fault that
requires service from an authorized dealer. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in Section 3 of this
manual for detailed information (if so equipped).
•
Adjustable Pedals Disabled – Cruise Engaged (with a
single chime) — only available on vehicles equipped
with memory seats.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Adjustable Pedals Disabled – Vehicle In Reverse (with
a single chime) — only available on vehicles equipped
with memory seats.
•
Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Transmit
•
Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Training
•
Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Trained
•
Clearing Channels
•
Channels Cleared
•
Channels Defaulted
•
Did Not Train
•
Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” in the “Starting And Operating” section of
this manual.
•
Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” in the “Starting And Operating” section of
this manual.
•
Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” in the “Starting And Operating” section of
this manual.
•
Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” in the “Starting And Operating” section of
this manual.
•
Check TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure Monitor” in the “Start-
ing And Operating” section of this manual.
•
Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in Section 5 of
this manual for more details)
•
Service Park Assist System (with a single chime)
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
•
Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode
•
Distance To Empty
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
4
•
Trip A
•
Trip B
•
Elapsed Time
•
Display Units of Measure in
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion:
•
Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
Vehicles with the 5.7L Multi-Displacement System (MDS)
may be equipped with the FUEL SAVER MODE in the
Trip Functions of the EVIC. The FUEL SAVER MODE
message will display above the average fuel economy in
the EVIC display. This message will appear whenever
MDS allows the engine to operate on four cylinders,
which will vary depending on driving habits and vehicle
usage.
4 Cylinder Operation - MDS On
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This feature allows you to monitor when the MDS
switches off the fuel on four of the eight cylinders and it
can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase
the time in which the fuel saver mode is active.
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
SELECT button.
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
•
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will
change to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display
will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding
a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off
the ⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will
display.
•
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last
reset.
•
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last
reset.
8 Cylinder Operation - MDS Off
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
4
•
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
•
Display Units of Measure in:
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “US” or “METRIC” appears.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button once to clear the resettable function being dis-
played. To reset all resettable functions, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within 3
seconds of resetting the currently displayed function
(>Reset ALL will display during this 3 second window).
Compass Display
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
compass button to display one of eight com-
pass readings and the outside temperature.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360° turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Turn on the ignition switch.
COM-
PASS
Button
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Press and hold the compass button for approximately
2 seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass”
displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
start the calibration. The message “CAL” will display in
the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360° turns (in an area free from
large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set
using the following procedure:
NOTE:
Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the overhead console. This is where the compass sensor is
located.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
4
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the compass button for approximately
2 seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance”
message and the last variance zone number displays in
the EVIC.
4. Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until
the proper variance zone is selected according to the
map.
5. Press and release the compass button to exit.
Telephone — If Equipped
Press and release the MENU button until “Telephone”
displays in the EVIC.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC pro-
vides the following telephone information:
•
Phone status: idle, voice mail, roaming, battery
strength, and signal strength in increments of 20
percent.
•
Call status: Incoming call, connecting, connected, air
time in minutes and seconds, call ended, call failed,
roaming, and no phone connection.
•
UConnect Active.
•
Caller ID phone number display.
When the appropriate conditions exist, and if supported
by the cell phone, the EVIC will display the following
telephone symbols:
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the
signal strength of the UConnect™ phone. The
number of horizontal bars increases as the
strength of the UConnect™ phone signal in-
creases.
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate an
incoming call.
Signal
Strength
Incom-
ing Call
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the UConnect™ phone is currently in analog
mode.
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the UConnect™ phone is currently roaming.
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
you have voice mail.
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate a
text message.
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the
battery strength of the UConnect™ phone.
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
a phone connection has been made.
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the UConnect™ phone is currently not avail-
able.
Analog
Roam-
ing
Voice
Mail
Text
Message
Battery
Strength
Call in
Progress
Phone
Not
Avail-
able
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
4
Navigation — If Equipped
Navigation Display Control
Press and release the MENU button until Navigation
displays in the EVIC. When the Navigation System is On,
the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map
or Menu display on the Navigation Unit. When the Menu
display is active, the SCROLLbutton can be used to scroll
through the list, the FUNCTION SELECT button can be
used to select an item, and the AUDIO MODE button can
be used to return to the previous menu. When the Map
display is active, pressing the FUNCTION SELECT but-
ton will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu.
Turn By Turn Directions
The EVIC displays turn-by-turn directions to a pro-
grammed destination when Turn by Turn Navigation is
enabled through Personal Settings. When enabled, the
EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the
top of the screen, followed by an arrow to indicate the
direction to turn the vehicle, and a count down to
indicate the distance to the turn.
NOTE:
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
detailed operating instructions.
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set-
tings displays in the EVIC.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
choices:
“Language”
When in this display you may select one of five lan-
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to
select English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais.
Then, as you continue, the information will display in the
selected language.
NOTE:
The EVIC will not change the UConnect™
language selection. Please refer to “Language Selection”
in the HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™)
section of this manual for details.
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 Km/h)”
When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit”
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park)
or N (Neutral) position and the driver’s door is opened.
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Remote Key Unlock”
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless
entry unlock button. When Driver Door 1st Press is
selected, you must press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will
unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button. To make your selection, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button until “Driver Door 1st
Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
“Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock” — If
Equipped
When ON is selected, you can use your Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter to recall one of two pre-programmed
memory profiles. Each memory profile contains desired
position settings for the driver seat, side mirror, adjust-
able pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic
steering column (if equipped), and a set of desired radio
station presets. When OFF is selected, only the memory
switch on the driver’s door panel will recall memory
profiles. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” ap-
pears. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in Section 3 of this
manual for more information.
“Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock”
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is pressed. This
feature may be selected with or without the flash lights
on lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON”
or “OFF” appears.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
4
“Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers” — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the system will automatically
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
the windshield. To make your selection, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF”
appears. When OFF is selected, the system reverts to the
standard intermittent wiper operation.
“Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit” — If
Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” ap-
pears.
NOTE:
The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used
to unlock the door. Refer to “Easy Entry/Exit Seat” under
“Driver Memory Seat” in Section 3 of this manual for
more information.
“Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock”
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” ap-
pears.
“Headlights On with Wipers” (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
NOTE:
Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3 of this manual.
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Delay Turning Headlights Off”
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
“Tilt Mirrors Down in Reverse” — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the outside rearview mirrors will
tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the ON
position and the transmission is in the R (Reverse)
position. The mirrors will move back to their previous
position when the transmission is shifted out of R (Re-
verse). To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” ap-
pears.
“Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock”
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90
sec.” appears.
“Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit”
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle
door will cancel this feature. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
“Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,” “30 min.,” or “60
min.” appears.
“Confirmation of Voice Commands” — If
Equipped
When ON is selected, all voice commands from the
UConnect™ system are confirmed. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Park Assist System” — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the system will scan for objects
behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the R
(Reverse) or N (Neutral) position. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
4
“Turn by Turn Navigation” — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the Turn-by-Turn directions will
appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig-
nated turn within a programmed route. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Display Units of Measure in”
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “US” or
“METRIC” appears.
“Automatic High Beams” — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Refer to
“SmartBeams” in section 3 of this manual for more
information.
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is
correct.
Analog Clock
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-
eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “ap-
parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio sig-
nals.
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia-
tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
NOTE:
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the radio, steering
wheel radio controls (if equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD
changer (if equipped) will remain active for 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC), the radio, steering
wheel radio controls (if equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
4
changer (if equipped) will remain active for up to 60
minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
programmable. For details, refer to “Delay Power Off to
Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Cus-
tomer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual.
SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC)
RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND
HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY
NOTE:
The radio sales code is located on the lower
right side of your radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
REF Radio
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selec-
tion. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF,
or turning ON/OFF the ignition, will cancel the MUTE
feature.
NOTE:
In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in either, AM, FM, or Satellite
(if equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
PSCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan
through preset stations in either, AM, FM, or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the
search, press PSCAN a second time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
4
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will display for
5 seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BALwill
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
ers.
Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
RND/SET Button (Radio Mode) To SET The
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Preset Buttons1-6(Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
Operation Instructions - CD Mode
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
4
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD
mode and begin to play. The display will show the track
number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track one.
NOTE:
•
On some vehicles, you may insert or eject a disc with
the radio or ignition switch OFF.
•
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player.
•
This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks.
SEEK Button (CD Mode)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track
on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the
beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning
of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10
seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
will also return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
EJECT Button (CD Mode)
Press this button and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. The
unit will switch to the last selected mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
TIME Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for 5 seconds.
RW/FF (CD Mode)
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player
will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW
(Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RND/SET Button (Random Play Button) (CD
Mode)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize
the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play
through the vehicle speakers.
The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical
device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3.5
mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases
the MODE button until AUX appears on the display.
NOTE:
The radio will return to the last stored mode if
the ignition switch is turned from the OFF/LOCK posi-
tion to the ACC position, the radio is turned on, and the
radio was previously in the AUX mode.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
MUTE Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
will also return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
4
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
RND/SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Mode Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — If
Equipped
Refer to the “HANDS FREE PHONE (UConnect™)”
section of the Owner’s Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If
Equipped
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s
Manual.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RAK – AM/FM/CASSETTE/CD
(6-DISC) RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE
RADIO, HANDS FREE PHONE, VIDEO, MP3, and
WMA CAPABILITIES
NOTE:
The radio sales code is located on the lower
right side of your radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, Cassette, Satellite, or Vehicle Entertainment
System (VES) (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if equipped) mode.
RAK Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
4
Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left
side to seek down. The radio will remained tuned to the
new station until you make another selection. Holding
the button and will bypass stations without stopping
until you release it.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds (satellite
scan 8 seconds) at each listenable station before continu-
ing to the next. To stop the search, press SCAN a second
time.
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will display for
5 seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the INFO button for an RBDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast (if available) from an FM station (FM
mode only).
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease
the frequency.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BALwill
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
ers.
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
balance, and fade.
RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5-second time
out, the PTY icon will turn off. Turning the tune knob
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broad-
cast PTY information.
Turn the tune knob to select the following format types:
Program Type
16 Digit-Character Dis-
play
No program type or un-
defined
None
News News
Information Information
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Rock Rock
Classic Rock Classic_Rock
Adult Hits Adult_Hits
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
4
Soft Rock Soft_Rock
Top 40 Top_40
Country Country
Oldies Oldies
Soft Soft
Nostalgia Nostalgia
Jazz Jazz
Classical Classical
Rhythm and Blues Rhythm_and_Blues
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft_R_&_B
Foreign Language Foreign_Language
Religious Music Religious_Music
Religious Talk Religious_Talk
Personality Personality
Public Public
College College
Unassigned
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
NOTE:
If you have selected a PTY with the tune knob,
simply pressing the tune button in will go directly to a
“PTY seek”.
Buttons1-6(Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
Operating Instructions — Tape Player
Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the
left and the mechanical action of the player will gently
pull the cassette into the play position.
NOTE:
When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,
the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm
up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may
be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and
demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Seek Button
Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the
tape and down to return to the beginning of the current
selection.
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
move 2 selections, etc.
Fast Forward (FF)
Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape
in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance
until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is
reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the
opposite direction.
Rewind (RW)
Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape
direction. The tape will reverse until the button is pressed
again or until the end of the tape is reached. At the end of
the tape, the tape will play in the opposite direction.
Tape Eject
Press this button and the cassette will disen-
gage and eject from the radio.
Scan Button
Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection.
Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature.
Changing Tape Direction
If you wish to change the direction of tape travel (side
being played), press Preset 6. The lighted arrow in the
display window will show the new direction.
Metal Tape Selection
If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player, the
player will automatically select the correct equalization.
Pinch Roller Release
If ignition power or the radio ON/OFF switch is turned
off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect
the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the
tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage
and the tape will resume play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
4
Noise Reduction
The Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on whenever the
tape player is on, but may be switched off.
To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System: Press
Preset 1 after you insert the tape. The NR light in the
display will go off when the Dolby System is off.
* ”Dolby” noise reduction is manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-
ratories Licensing Corporation.
Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio
Play)
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE:
Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact
discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks
and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks
and WMA.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio
Play)
LOAD/EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
LOAD/EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the LOAD/EJT button for 5 seconds and
all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2-minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes, the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
4
RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
NOTE:
MP3 and WMARandom Play are for file folders
only.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Buttons1-6(CDMODEforCDAudio Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R, and CD-RW.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 15
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
4
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 and WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 and WMA files may
be affected by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 and
WMA Audio Play)
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play)
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
file. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the
beginning of the file. Pressing the button within the first
ten seconds plays the previous file.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA
Play)
LOAD/EJT - Load
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the
disc is loading.
LOAD/EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2-minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes, the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and INFO button while playing MP3 or WMA disc.
The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if avail-
able).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button while in the message
display priority mode or elapsed time display priority
mode will display the song title for each file.
RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the file or MP3 and WMA selection.
TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
4
RND/PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
to select a folder.
Buttons1-6(CDModeforMP3Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Phone” in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)
Guide.”
SALES CODE REC — AM/FM/CD (6–DISC) RADIO
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3
Capability (REC) - combines a Global-Positioning
System-based navigation system with an integrated color
REC Radio
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
screen to provide maps, turn identification, selection
menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destina-
tions and routes, AM/FM stereo radio and six-disc CD
changer with MP3 capability.
Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a
DVD that is loaded into the unit. One map DVD covers
all of North America. Refer to your “Navigation User’s
Manual” for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If
Equipped)
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
REC Setting the Clock
GPS Clock
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The
satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the sys-
tem’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone
and daylight savings information is set.
1. At the Main Menu screen, highlight “Clock Setup”
and press ENTER OR press and hold for 3 seconds the
TIME button on the unit’s faceplate. The Clock Setup
screen appears.
2. To show the GPS clock, select “Displayed Clock: GPS
Clock” and press ENTER.
3. To adjust the time zone, Select “Time Zone” and press
ENTER. Select the appropriate time zone and press
ENTER.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
4
4. To turn daylight savings on or off, select “Daylight
Savings” and press ENTER. Select “On” or “Off” and
press ENTER.
5. Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode. Press
ENTER to save your changes. If you press CANCEL or
NAV then your changes will not be saved.
User Defined Clock
If you wish to set the clock to a time different than the
system clock, you can manually adjust the time by
choosing the “User Defined Clock” option.
1. At the Clock Setup screen highlight “Displayed
Clock: User Defined Clock”.
2. To increase the clock by hours, make sure “HR +” is
highlighted and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to
increase the clock by another hour. You will see on the
“User Defined Time” display the number of hours you
have increased the clock by.
3. To decrease the clock by one hour, use the Select
Encoder to highlight the “-” sign. Press ENTER. Press
ENTER again to decrease the clock by another hour.
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. To increase the clock by minutes, make sure “MIN +”
is highlighted and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to
increase the clock by another minute.
5. To decrease the clock by minutes, use the Select
Encoder to highlight the “-“ sign. Press ENTER. Press
ENTER again to decrease the clock by another minute.
6. Select “DONE” to exit from the clock setting mode.
Press ENTER to save your changes. If you press CAN-
CEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved.
Audio Clock Display
Select this option to change the size of the clock on the
audio screens.
1. When you are at an audio screen, quickly press the
TIME button on the navigation faceplate.
2. In this example the large clock appears on the screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
4
3. To switch the clock to the small clock, quickly press
TIME again.
4. To toggle back to the large clock, simply press TIME.
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (SALES CODE
XRV) — IF EQUIPPED
The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) con-
sists of a DVD player and LCD (liquid crystal display)
screen, a battery-powered remote control, and two head-
sets. The system is located in the center console storage
bin under the armrest lid. Refer to your VES™ User’s
Manual for detailed operating instructions.
Accessing The VES
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Raising The DVD Screen Remote Control Location
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
4
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel-
lite Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
System Activation
NOTE:
Your vehicle’s radio must be on and in satellite
mode when the activation process takes place.
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following informa-
tion available when activating your system:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Credit card information.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Num-
ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
ESN/SID Access With REF Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and Time buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the
twelve-digit ESN/SID number will display. Press the
SEEK UP button to display the next four digits. Continue
to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN/SID
digits display. The SEEK DOWN will page down until
the first four digits display. The radio will exit the
ESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, the
ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any
button was pushed.
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ESN/SID Access With RAQ and RAK Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID num-
bers will display. The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode
when any other button is pushed, the ignition is turned
OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button was
pushed.
ESN/SID Access With REC Navigation Radios
Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual.
With the ignition in the ACCESSORY position and the
radio off, press the CD Eject and Set buttons simulta-
neously until the 12 digits of the ESN/SID appear on the
screen.
Selecting Satellite Mode in REF, RAQ, and RAK
Radios
Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ and RAK Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
These radios will also display the current station name
and program type. For more information, such as song
title and artist press the MSG or INFO button.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word ⬙SCAN⬙ will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
4
NOTE:
Channels that may contain objectionable con-
tent can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at
888-539-7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or
unblocking. Please have your ESN/SID information
available.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if
equipped)
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
PTY Button ⴖSCANⴖ
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
⬙SCAN⬙ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the ⬙SCAN⬙
button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE:
Pressing the ⬙SEEK⬙ or ⬙SCAN⬙ button, while
performing a music type scan, will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
PTY Button ⴖSEEKⴖ
When the desired program is obtained, press the ⬙SEEK⬙
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be
placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items
directly on or above the antenna.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the
surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o’clock
positions.
Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons
are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). The EVIC features a driver-interactive
display. This is located in the upper part of the instru-
ment cluster between the speedometer and tachometer.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
4
The VOLUME button controls the sound level
of the sound system. Press the top of the
VOLUME button to increase the sound level.
Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to
decrease the sound level.
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. This screen
displays radio station frequencies, any one of
twelve radio station preset frequencies, CD
disc number, CD track number, tape, or any
one of 200 Satellite radio channels depending
on which radio is in the vehicle.
If Compass/Temp/Audio is already displayed when the
AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the radio mode
will change from AM to FM, to Tape, to CD, or to Satellite
(SAT) accordingly.
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the FUNCTION SELECT
button to advance the radio to the next preset
station, to change the side of the tape being
played (if so equipped), or to change the cur-
rent CD track being played (if so equipped).
when the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the SCROLL button to seek
up and down the radio stations, CD track
numbers (if so equipped), or satellite radio
channels (if so equipped).
The following describes the operation of the SCROLL
button in each mode:
Radio Operation
Press the top of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the
next listenable station up from the current setting. Press
the bottom of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the next
listenable station down from the current setting.
VOL-
UME
Button
AUDIO
MODE
Button
FUNC-
TION
SELECT
Button
SCROLL
Button
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tape Player Operation
Press the top of the SCROLL button once to listen to the
next track on the cassette. Press the bottom of the
SCROLL button once either to listen to the beginning of
the current track or to listen to the beginning of the
previous track if it is within 5 seconds after the current
track begins to play.
Press either the top or bottom of the SCROLL button
twice to listen to the second track on the tape, three times
to listen to the third track, and so forth.
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to change the side
of the tape being played.
CD Player Operation
Press the top of the SCROLL button once to listen to the
next track on the CD. Press the bottom of the SCROLL
button once either to listen to the beginning of the current
track or to listen to the beginning of the previous track if
it is within one second after the current track begins to
play.
Press either the top or bottom of the SCROLL button
twice to listen to the second track on the CD, three times
to listen to the third track, and so forth.
Satellite Radio Operation
Press the top of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the
next listenable station up from the current setting. Press
the bottom of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the next
listenable station down from the current setting.
CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE
To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,
take the following precautions:
1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,
sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin-
ished.
2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from
slackness and dust when it is not in use.
3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat,
and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.
4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is
adhering flatly to the cassette.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
4
5. A loose tape should be corrected before use. To rewind
a loose tape, insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape
drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions.
Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan
shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape
deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of
deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap
around and become lodged in the tape transport. The
other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from
one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were
turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should
periodically clean the head with a commercially available
WET cleaning cassette.
As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every
30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very
dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to
remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Temperature Control
The rotary knob in the center controls
air temperature. Rotate the control to
the left for cooler air temperature and
to the right for warmer air tempera-
ture. Rotating the control to the ex-
treme left provides the coldest setting.
Rotating the control to the extreme
right provides the warmest setting.
Mode Control
The rotary knob on the right controls
airflow distribution. Dots between
each of the mode selections identify
intermediate modes that allow the op-
erator to fine-tune airflow distribu-
tion. The mode settings are as follows:
•
Defrost
Air is directed to the windshield through the
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
also directed to the front door windows through the
side window demister grilles.
NOTE:
To improve fuel economy, leave in defrost only
when necessary.
•
Defrost/Floor
Air flows through the front and rear floor
outlets and the outlets at the base of the
windshield. Air is also directed to the front
door windows through the side window demister
grilles.
•
Floor
Air flows through the floor outlets located
under the instrument panel and into the rear
seating area through vents under the front seats.
•
Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and through the outlets lo-
cated on the floor. Air flows through the registers in
the back of the center console to the rear seat
passengers. These registers can be closed to par-
tially block airflow.
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel. Air flows through the regis-
ters in the back of the center console to the rear seat
passengers. These registers can be closed to block
airflow.
•
Recirculation Control
The mode control knob also controls the
recirculation feature. You can choose Bi-
Level Recirculation air outlets, Panel Re-
circulation air outlets, or a mix or both
while in this mode. Normally, air enters from out-
side the vehicle. However, when in Recirculation
mode air inside the vehicle is re-used. Use this
mode to cool the inside of the vehicle rapidly. The
Recirculation mode can also be used to temporarily
block out outside odors, smoke, and dust.
Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to turn on and turn off the air
conditioning. When the air conditioning is turned
on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the
outlets selected with the mode control. Press this button
a second time to turn off the air conditioning. An LED in
the button will illuminate when compressor operation is
selected.
Automatic Temperature Control — If Equipped
Automatic Operation
The Infrared Dual-Zone Climate Control System auto-
matically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle
at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
To accomplish this, the system gathers information from
Automatic Temperature Controls
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
4
the controls on the climate control, from a dual sun-
sensor located in the top of the instrument panel, from an
infrared sensor located in the face of the climate control,
and from various sensors located throughout the vehicle.
The controls on the climate control provide the system
with operator input. The dual sun-sensor monitors sun
load coming through the windshield. The infrared sensor
independently measures the surface temperature of the
driver and passenger. Other sensors take account of
vehicle-speed, A/C pressure, outside temperature, and
engine cooling temperature. Using all of these inputs, the
system automatically adjusts airflow temperature, air-
flow distribution, airflow volume, and the amount of
outside air recirculation. This maintains a comfortable
temperature even under changing conditions.
Operation of the system is quite simple. Begin by turning
the Mode Control knob (on the right) to AUTO, and place
the Blower Control knob (on the left) to either LO AUTO
or HI AUTO. The LO AUTO position should be used for
front seat occupants only. The HI AUTO position should
be used when more airflow is desired, or when rear seat
occupants are present. Then, dial in the temperature you
would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver
or passenger Temperature Control knob. Once the com-
fort level is selected, the system will maintain that level
automatically using the heating system. Should the de-
sired comfort level require air conditioning, the system
will automatically make the adjustment.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the OFF position on the fan control stops the system
completely and closes the outside air intake.
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.
NOTE:
The temperature setting can be adjusted at any
time without affecting automatic operation.
Air conditioning in this system is automatic.
Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button
while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the
control button to flash three times and then turn off.
This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and
requesting the air conditioning is not necessary.
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system will automatically control recir-
culation. However, pressing the Recircula-
tion Control button will temporarily put the
system in recirculation mode (ten minutes).
This can be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the
control button to illuminate. After ten minutes, the
system will return to normal AUTO mode function
and the LED will turn off.
NOTE:
•
The surface of the climate control panel and the top
center of the instrument panel should be kept free of
debris due to the location of the climate control
sensors. Mud on the windshield may also cause poor
operation of this system.
•
Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
Recirculation to be selected while in defrost or
defrost/floor mode. Attempting to use the recircula-
tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the
control button to blink and then turn off.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Pre-
ferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
NOTE:
Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart that follows for details.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
4
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
•
Defrost
Air is directed to the windshield through the
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
also directed to the front door windows through the
side window demister grilles.
•
Defrost/Floor
Air flows through the front and rear floor
outlets and the outlets at the base of the
windshield. Air is also directed to the front
door windows through the side window demister
grilles.
•
Floor
Air flows through the floor outlets located
under the instrument panel and into the rear
seating area through vents under the front seats.
•
Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and through the outlets lo-
cated on the floor. Air flows through the registers in
the back of the center console to the rear seat
passengers. These registers can be closed to block
airflow.
•
Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel. Air flows through the regis-
ters in the back of the center console to the rear seat
passengers. These registers can be closed to block
airflow.
•
Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to turn on the air condition-
ing during manual operation only. When the
air conditioning is turned on, cool dehumidi-
fied air will flow through the outlets selected with
the Mode control dial. Press this button a second
time to turn off the air conditioning. An LED in the
button illuminates when manual compressor opera-
tion is selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
4
NOTE:
To control the air conditioning manually, the
mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position.
•
Recirculation Control
This button can be used to block out smoke,
odors, dust, high humidity, or if rapid cooling
is desired. The recirculation mode should only
be used temporarily. An LED in the button
illuminates when the recirculation mode is active. You
may use this feature separately.
NOTE:
Extended use of recirculation may cause the
windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to
fog, press the Recirculation button to return to outside
air. Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibil-
ity. For this reason, the system will not allow Recircula-
tion to be selected while in defrost or defrost/floor mode.
Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes
will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then
turn off.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer
to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of this manual
for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
air and high blower setting. This will insure adequate
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com-
pressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
NOTE:
Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
Section 7 of this manual for filter replacement instruc-
tions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
4
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Electric Rear Window Defroster
The electric Rear Window Defroster Control is
located on the climate control. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated side
mirrors (if equipped). An LED in the button will illumi-
nate when the rear window defroster is ON. The de-
froster automatically turns off after approximately 10
minutes of operation for the first push of the button, and
will turn off after approximately 5 minutes for the second
push of the button.
CAUTION!
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the
rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp
instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window.
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures
....................234
▫ Automatic Transmission ................235
▫ Normal Starting ......................235
▫ Extremely Cold Weather
(Below ⫺20°F Or ⫺29°C) ................235
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................235
▫ After Starting ........................236
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped
........237
䡵 Automatic Transmission
.................237
▫ Automatic Transmission — General
Information .........................238
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .240
▫ 4 Speed Automatic Transmission ..........240
▫ 5 Speed Automatic Transmission ..........245
䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped
...............249
▫ AutoStick威 Operation ..................249
䡵 All Wheel Drive — If Equipped
...........250
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces
.............250
▫ Acceleration .........................250
▫ Traction ............................251
䡵 Parking Brake
.........................251
䡵 Brake System
.........................253
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System — If Equipped .....253
5
䡵 Power Steering
........................255
䡵 Multi Displacement System (MDS) -
5.7L Engine Only
......................256
䡵 Traction Control System (TCS) —
If Equipped
..........................257
䡵 Brake Assist System (BAS) — If Equipped
....258
䡵 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) —
If Equipped
..........................259
▫ Synchronizing ESP ....................261
▫ ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator And ESP/TCS
Indicator Lights ......................262
䡵 Tire Safety Information
..................262
▫ Tire Markings ........................262
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ..........266
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........267
䡵 Tires — General Information
..............271
▫ Tire Pressure .........................271
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................272
▫ Radial-Ply Tires ......................274
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped .........274
▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped .........275
▫ Tire Spinning ........................275
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................276
▫ Life Of Tire .........................277
▫ Replacement Tires .....................277
▫ Alignment And Balance .................278
䡵 Self–Sealing Tires — If Equipped
..........279
䡵 Tire Chains
...........................279
䡵 Snow Tires
...........................280
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations
...........280
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) —
If Equipped
..........................281
▫ Base System — If Equipped ..............284
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Premium System — If Equipped ..........285
▫ General Information ...................288
䡵 Fuel Requirements
.....................289
▫ 2.7L Engine .........................289
▫ 3.5L And 5.7L Engines ..................289
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................290
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............290
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................290
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................291
▫ Fuel System Cautions ..................291
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ..............292
䡵 Adding Fuel
..........................293
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............293
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............295
䡵 Vehicle Loading
.......................295
▫ Vehicle Certification Label ...............295
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .......296
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) .........296
▫ Overloading .........................296
▫ Loading ............................297
䡵 Trailer Towing
........................298
▫ Common Towing Definitions .............298
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ...............301
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) .........301
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............303
▫ Towing Requirements ..................304
▫ Towing Tips .........................308
䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.)
309
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) ............................309
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
5
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys
in the ignition. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave animals or children inside parked
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat build up
may cause serious injury or death.
•
Be sure to turn off the engine if you want to rest or
sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by
inadvertently moving the gear selection lever or
by pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause
excessive heat in the exhaust system, resulting in
overheating and vehicle fire, which may cause
serious or fatal injuries.
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine.Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
Normal Starting
Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key to the “START” position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine has not started
within 3 seconds, slightly depress the accelerator pedal
while continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start
within 15 seconds, turn the key to the “LOCK” position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting
procedure.
Extremely Cold Weather (below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure, it may be flooded.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there while cranking the engine. This should clear
any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
5
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Un-
burned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
once the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. See section 6 of
this manual for the proper jump-starting proce-
dures and follow them carefully.
If the engine is flooded, it may start to run, but not have
enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking up to 15
seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to
the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the key once
the engine is running smoothly. Do not overspeed the
engine.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15-
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “NORMAL STARTING” procedure
should be repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could
cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
engine is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
5
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Automatic Transmission — General Information
The automatic transmission selects individual gears au-
tomatically, dependent upon:
•
Altitude
•
Vehicle Loading
•
Driving Style
•
Selector lever position
•
Accelerator position
•
Vehicle speed
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, de-
pendent on the driving style, the driving situation and
the road characteristics.
NOTE:
•
After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to
allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating,
especially when the engine is cold.
•
If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle
the key to the LOCK position before restarting. Trans-
mission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds
after restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCK
position first.
•
The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the
break-in period. This is a normal condition, and pre-
cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
The selector lever is automatically locked while in the P
(Park) position. To move the selector lever out of the P
(Park) position, the brake pedal must be firmly depressed
before the shift lock will release.
Shift the selector lever to the desired position only when
the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is
applied. Do not release the brake until ready to drive. The
vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the selec-
tor lever is in D (Drive) or R (Reverse) position.
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the vehicle into P (Park), remove the key from
the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the
key is removed from the ignition, the transmission
selector lever is locked in the P (Park) position,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
Furthermore, you should never leave children unat-
tended inside a vehicle.
Over Temperature Mode
The transmission electronics constantly monitor the
transmission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds
normal operating temperature, the transmission will
change the way it shifts to help control the condition.
This may result in a slightly different feeling or response
during normal operation in D (Drive) position. After the
transmission cools down, it will return to normal opera-
tion.
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
5
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a brake transmission shift
interlock system (BTSI) that holds the selector lever in the
P (Park) position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the selector lever out of the P (Park)
position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON
position, and the brake pedal must be depressed.
For electrical system malfunctions, there is an override
for the interlock system. In order to override this system
the key must be in the ignition with the switch in the
ACC or ON positions. Remove the rubber storage tray
from the bin located to the right of the selector lever. The
override can be activated by pressing the pink-colored
tab, which can be accessed through a hole inside the bin.
While the override is pressed, the shifter can be moved
out of the park position without pressing the brake. After
operation, return the rubber storage tray to its original
position.
4 Speed Automatic Transmission
Shifting from D (Drive) to P (Park) or R (Reverse) (or
from P or R to D) should be done only after the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the
selector lever between these gears.
Brake Interlock Override
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges
P (Park)
P (Park) supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in
this range.
When parking on a flat surface, place the gear selector in
the P (Park) position first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in P (Park), other-
wise the load on the transmission locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the selector out of park. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
WARNING!
Never use Park position on an automatic transmis-
sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
Selector Lever
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
5
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the selector lever into the P (Park)
position:
•
When shifting into P (Park) move the lever all the way
forward until it stops, and is fully seated.
•
Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
panel to ensure it is in the P (Park) position.
CAUTION!
Damage to the shifter could result if the selector
lever is moved out of P (Park) before the ignition is
turned from the LOCK to ON position.
R (Reverse)
For moving the vehicle rearward. Always stop before
moving the lever to R (Reverse), except when rocking
the vehicle.
N (Neutral)
Engine may be started in this range.
CAUTION!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason
with selector lever in NEUTRAL can result in trans-
mission damage.
WARNING!
Do not coast in N (Neutral) and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
D (Overdrive)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest up shifts and down
shifts, and the best fuel economy. Select the “3” range
when frequent transmission shifting occurs when us-
ing the Overdrive range, such as when operating the
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle under heavy loading conditions (in hilly ter-
rain, traveling into strong head winds, or while tow-
ing heavy trailers.
NOTE:
•
If the vehicle is started in cold temperatures, shifts into
Overdrive may be delayed. Normal Overdrive and
shifting operation will resume when the temperature
of the transmission reaches the appropriate tempera-
ture. Refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” later in this section.
•
If the transmission temperature gets too hot, the
transmission may downshift out of Overdrive or en-
gage overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the
transmission cools down. After cooldown, Overdrive
will resume normal operation.
3 (Third)
This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive. The trans-
mission will operate normally in First, Second and
Third while in this range. The “3” position should also
be used when descending steep grades to prevent
brake system distress.
NOTE:
Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat build up.
L (Low)
This range should be used for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, upshifts will
occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts
occur earlier than other gear range selections.
CAUTION!
Never race the engine with the brakes on and the
vehicle in gear, and never hold the vehicle on an
incline without applying the brakes. These practices
can cause overheating and damage to the transmission.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
5
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly differ-
ent feeling or response during normal operation in high
gear. When the vehicle speed drops, or during accelera-
tion, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
NOTE:
•
The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
transmission fluid and engine coolant is warm (usu-
ally after 1–3 miles (1.6–4.8 km) of driving). Because
engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmis-
sion is not shifting into “Overdrive” when cold. This is
considered a normal condition. Pulling the selector
lever into the “3” position will show that the transmis-
sion is able to shift into and out of “Overdrive.”
•
If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans-
mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
transmission fluid partially draining from the torque
converter into the transmission. This is considered a
normal condition and it will not cause damage to the
transmission. The torque converter will refill within 5
seconds of shifting from P (Park) into any other gear
position.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions. If a
condition is detected that could cause damage, the transmis-
sion automatically shifts into second gear. The transmission
remains in second gear despite the forward gear selected. P
(Park), R (Reverse), and N (Neutral) will continue to operate.
This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer
for service without damaging the transmission.
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears.
•
Stop the vehicle and shift into P (Park).
•
Turn the key to LOCK then start the engine.
•
Shift into D (Drive) and resume driving.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit a dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equip-
ment to determine if the problem could recur.
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the transmission cannot be reset, dealer service is
required.
5 Speed Automatic Transmission
Shifting from D (Drive) to P (Park) or R (Reverse) (or
from P or R to D) should be done only after the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the
selector lever between these gears.
Gear Ranges
P (Park)
P (Park) supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in
this range.
When parking on a flat surface, place the gear selector in
the P (Park) position first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in P (Park), other-
wise the load on the transmission locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the selector out of park. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
Selector Lever
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
5
WARNING!
Never use Park position on an automatic transmis-
sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the selector lever into the P (Park)
position:
•
When shifting into P (Park) move the lever all the way
forward until it stops, and is fully seated.
•
Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
panel to ensure it is in the P (Park) position.
CAUTION!
Damage to the shifter could result if the selector
lever is moved out of P (Park) before the ignition is
turned from the LOCK to ON position.
R (Reverse)
Shift into R (Reverse) gear only when the vehicle is
completely stopped.
N (Neutral)
No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive
axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be
moved freely (pushed or towed). Do not engage N
(Neutral) position while driving except to coast when
the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g., on icy roads).
The engine may be started in this range. Use this range
for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed.
CAUTION!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason
with selector lever in NEUTRAL can result in trans-
mission damage.
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not coast in N (Neutral) and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
D (Drive)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts and best fuel economy.
The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth
gear. The D (Drive) position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using
the Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, travel-
ing into strong head winds, or while towing heavy
trailers, use the AutoStick威 mode and select the “3”
range.
AutoStick威 Gear selection
The AutoStick威 feature can be selected by pressing the
selector lever to the right or the left with the lever in the
D (Drive) position. The gear currently selected is indi-
cated in the instrument cluster display. Briefly, press the
selector lever in the “D -” direction and the transmission
will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear.
Press and hold the selector lever in the “D-” direction and
the transmission will shift from the current gear directly
to the next lowest gear for best acceleration.
NOTE:
To avoid overrevving the engine when the
selector lever is moved in “D -” direction, the transmis-
sion will not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s revolu-
tions per minute (RPM) limit would be exceeded.
Briefly, press the selector lever in the “D +” direction and
the transmission will shift from the current gear to the
next higher gear.
Press and hold the selector lever in the “D +” direction
and the transmission will shift from the current gear
directly to gear “D.”
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
5
WARNING!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order
to obtain braking action. This could result in drive
wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehi-
cle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
You could lose control of your vehicle and have an
accident.
Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures
During cold temperature operation, you may notice
delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency.
Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
If a condition is detected that could result in transmission
damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode.
If vehicle acceleration worsens, or the transmission no
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in
the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission
will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is
brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, P (Park),
R (Reverse), and N (Neutral) will continue to operate.
Second gear will operate in the D (Drive) shifter position.
The Malfunction Indicator Light may be illuminated.
A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be
driven to a dealer for service. To reset the transmission,
use the following procedure:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position.
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Move the selector lever to the desired range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit a dealer at your earliest
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equip-
ment to determine if the problem could recur.
Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears.
Permanent Transmission Limp Home Mode
Permanent Limp Home Mode will be activated if the
transmission enters temporary Limp Home Mode three
times. Follow the reset procedure described under “Tem-
porary Transmission Limp Home Mode” in this section.
In Permanent Limp Home Mode, P (Park), R (Reverse),
and N (Neutral) will continue to operate. Second gear
will operate in the D (Drive) shifter position. The mal-
function indicator light may illuminate.
AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED
Autostick威 is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of
the vehicle. Autostick威 allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Autostick姞 Operation
By placing the selector lever in the D (Drive) position, it
can be moved from side to side. This allows the driver to
select a higher or lower range of gears. Moving the
selector lever to the Left (-) triggers a downshift and to
the Right (+) an upshift. The gear position will display in
the instrument cluster on the transmission range indica-
tor.
You can shift in or out of theAutostick威 mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you
choose the Overdrive mode, the transmission will oper-
ate automatically, shifting between the five available
gears. When you wish to engage Autostick威, simply
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
5
move the selector lever to the Right or Left (D+/D-) while
in the D (Drive) position. The transmission will remain in
the current gear until an upshift or downshift is chosen.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides full time All Wheel Drive (AWD)
with Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)/Traction Control.
The front wheels provide 38% of the torque, and the rear
wheels provide 62% of the torque. The system is auto-
matic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills
required.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the front differential and/or
the transfer case.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear
(driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger-
ous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of
the rear wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
PARKING BRAKE
The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use Park position on an automatic transmis-
sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
When parking on a flat surface, place the gear selector in
the P (Park) position first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to apply the
parking brake before placing the gear selector in P (Park),
otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha-
nism may make it difficult to move the selector out of
park. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels
toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
5
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
parking brake, push the parking brake pedal down and
then remove your foot from the pedal. To release the
parking brake, push down on the parking brake pedal
and then release.
The brake light in the instrument cluster will turn on
when the parking brake is applied and the ignition
switch is on.
NOTE:
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys
in the ignition. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving: failure to do so can lead to brake
failure, and an accident.
Parking Brake
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine off)
the brakes will still function. The effort required to brake
the vehicle will be much greater than that required with
the power system operating.
Anti-Lock Brake System — If Equipped
The Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle
stability and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the
brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
The electronic brake force distribution (EBD) prevents the
rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
control of available braking forces applied to the rear
axle.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
5
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
•
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
•
the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
•
brake pedal pulsations,
•
and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated elec-
tronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output radio
transmitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified pro-
fessionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on
your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.
• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws
of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by
the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those re-
sulting from excessive speed in turns, following another
vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
Anti-Lock Brake Light
The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem. The light will come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not function-
ing. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power
steering pump may make noise for a short amount of
time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and
does not in any way damage the steering system.
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
5
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the
end of the steering wheel travel will increase the
steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided
when possible. Damage to the power steering pump
may occur.
MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS) - 5.7L
Engine Only
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE:
The MDS system may take some time to return
to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
The Traction Control System (TCS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded. The
TCS cannot prevent accidents, including those re-
sulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydroplan-
ing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of a TCS-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
The Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator
Light, located in the instrument cluster, starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the
wheels begin to spin. This indicates that the
TCS is active. If the indicator light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The TCS OFF button is located in the center of the
instrument panel. To turn OFF the TCS, momentarily
press the button and the TCS Indicator Light will illumi-
nate. To turn the system ON again, momentarily press
the TCS OFF button and the indicator light will turn OFF.
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
5
NOTE:
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, switch off the TCS by pressing the TCS OFF
button.
CAUTION!
When the TCS Indicator Light is illuminated con-
tinuously, the TCS is switched off. Avoid spinning
one drive wheel. This may cause serious damage to
the drive train.
NOTE:
•
The Traction Control System comes on each time the
ignition switch is turned ON. This will occur even if
you used the Traction Control Button to turn OFF the
system.
•
The Traction Control System will make buzzing or
clicking sounds when in operation.
BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM (BAS) — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
The BAS (Brake Assist System) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail-
ing road conditions. The BAS cannot prevent acci-
dents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a
BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is standard on vehicles
equipped with Electronic Stability Program (ESP). The
BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capa-
bility during emergency braking maneuvers. The system
applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency
braking conditions than might otherwise be afforded
solely by the driver’s braking style. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking power
during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP) — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
The ESP (Electronic Stability Program) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. The ESP cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
5
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
•
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The ESP/TCS indicator light, located in the
instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
active. The indicator light also flashes when the
TCS is active. If the indicator light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESP OFF button is located in the center of the
instrument panel. To turn OFF the ESP, momentarily
press the ESP OFF button and the ESP/TCS indicator
light will illuminate. To turn the system ON again,
momentarily press the ESP OFF button and the indicator
light will turn OFF.
NOTE:
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, switch off the ESP by pressing the ESP OFF
button.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
When ESP is switched off, the engine torque reduction
feature is cancelled. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESP is unavailable. However, a fea-
ture of the system remains active. This feature controls
wheel spin across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip
differential. If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster
than the other, the system will apply the brake of the
spinning wheel and allow more engine torque to be
applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This wheel slip
control is active at vehicle speeds between approximately
24 mph (40 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h).
CAUTION!
When the ESP/TCS indicator light is illuminated
continuously, the ESP is switched off. Avoid spin-
ning one drive wheel. This may cause serious dam-
age to the drive train.
CAUTION!
If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised, the
engine must be shut off (key in the ignition switch to
the OFF/LOCK or ACC position). Otherwise, the ESP
will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear
wheel brakes.
Synchronizing ESP
The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is
combined with BAS indicator. If the power
supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or
discharged), the ESP/BAS malfunction indica-
tor light may illuminate with the engine running. If this
should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the
left and then to the right. The ESP/BAS malfunction
indicator light should go out. However, if the light
remains on, have the ESP and BAS checked at your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
5
ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator and ESP/TCS
Indicator Lights
The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is
combined with the BAS indicator. The yellow
ESP/BAS malfunction indicator light and the
yellow ESP/TCS indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster both come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position. They should go out with the
engine running.
The system will turn the ESP/BAS malfunction indicator
light on continuously while the engine running if it
detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or
both. If the light remains on after several ignition cycles,
and you have driven the vehicle several miles at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), and the ESP is synchro-
nized (refer to Synchronizing ESP), see your authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
•
LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
5
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—⬙R⬙ means Radial Construction.
—⬙D⬙ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-
der specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
5
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
Tire Placard Location
Tire and Loading Information
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
5
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” sec-
tion of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capaci-
ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865
lbs. (392 Kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
5
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
1. Safety—
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can
result in tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
5
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump-
tion.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B”
pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
Tire Placard Location
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
5
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold
tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire
placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly.
Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
Refer to the paragraph on “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in
Section 6 of this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
5
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and don’t let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident result-
ing in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
5
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combina-
tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance charac-
teristics, resulting in changes to steering, han-
dling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose control
and have an accident resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
•
Fast tire wear.
•
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
•
Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
SELF–SEALING TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
A non-hardening viscous sealant applied to the inner
liner of each tire fills punctures up to 0.19 in. (5 mm) to
minimize the loss of air pressure. This contributes to the
safety of the vehicle by significantly reducing the prob-
ability of a roadside stop due to a flat tire.
TIRE CHAINS
Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer.
NOTE:
Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Broken
chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle
immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain
breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the chain
before further use.
• Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as pos-
sible and then retighten after driving about
1
⁄
2
mile
(0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Use on Rear Wheels only.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on the method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for use. Always use the lower suggested
operating speed of the chain manufacturer if differ-
ent from the speed recommended by the manufac-
ture.
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
5
NOTE:
In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time
on dry pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s
instructions on method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for usage.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest
a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/h).
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
Follow the “Maintenance Schedules” in Section 8 of this
manual for the recommended tire rotation frequency for
your type of driving. Remember, more frequent rotation
is permissible if desired. Also, correct for anything caus-
ing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire
rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) — IF
EQUIPPED
•
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
•
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pres-
sure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1 km)
after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure
molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to the “Tires –
General Information” in this section for information
on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this
is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
5
•
The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-
pressure warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects.
•
The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of
low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low
tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-
tale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire
pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to
turn off. The system will automatically update and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off
once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
−
For example, your vehicle may have a recom-
mended cold (parked for more than 3 hours) placard
pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient tempera-
ture is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is
27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C)
will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23
psi (157 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low
enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa),
but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after
the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value.
NOTE:
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. After-market wheels
can cause sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant
from a can, or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale light.
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
5
Base System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible
chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one
or more of the four active road tires. The audible chime
will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition
that it detects. Should this occur, you should stop as soon
as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on
your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure value. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information. Low
pressure in the spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to
sound.
Check TPMS Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 60 seconds and an audible chime will sound
when a system fault is detected. The flash cycle will
repeat every ten minutes, without an audible chime, until
the fault condition no longer exists. If the ignition key is
cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system
fault still exists.
NOTE:
The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the
TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
tire. However, if you install the compact spare tire in
place of a road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will still sound
each ignition key cycle. Once you repair or replace the
original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically
and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn
OFF, as long no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
3 Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel-wells)
•
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
5
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible
chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one
or more of the four active road tires. The audible chime
will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition
that it detects. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC) will display one or more Low
Pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, Right Front,
Right Rear) for 3 seconds and a graphic showing the
pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure
values flashing. Should this occur, you should stop as
soon as possible, and inflate the tires with low pressure
(those flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
EVIC will stop flashing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information. Low
pressure in the spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to
sound.
NOTE:
You can change the pressure units to display in
PSI, kPA, or BAR. Refer to “Language,” under “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Sec-
tion 4 of this manual for details.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
Check TPMS Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 60 seconds and an audible chime will sound
when a system fault is detected. The flash cycle will
repeat every ten minutes, without an audible chime, until
the fault condition no longer exists. In addition to the
telltale and chime, the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for 3 seconds when a system fault is detected. In
the event that a fault occurs because the system did not
receive a pressure value from one or more Tire Pressure
Monitoring Sensors, the EVIC will display the ⬙CHECK
TPM SYSTEM⬙ message and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not
being received.
NOTE:
You can change the pressure units to display in
PSI, kPA, or BAR. Refer to “Language,” under “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Sec-
tion 4 of this manual for details.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes.
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
5
NOTE:
The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the
TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare
tire. However, if you install the compact spare tire in
place of a road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will still sound
each ignition key cycle. In addition, the EVIC will still
display a low-pressure message and a flashing pressure
value in the graphic display. Once you repair or replace
the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in
place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update auto-
matically. In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-
tale Light will turn OFF, and the graphic in the EVIC will
stop flashing and display a new pressure value, as long
no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit
in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25
km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States .....................KR5S120123
Canada ........................2671-S120123
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.7L Engine
Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane of 87.
3.5L and 5.7L Engines
The 3.5L and 5.7L engines are designed to
meet all emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and perfor-
mance when using high-quality unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 87 to 89.
The manufacturer recommends the use of
89-octane for optimum performance. The routine use of
premium gasoline is not recommended. The use of
premium gasoline will provide no benefit over high
quality regular gasoline or mid-grade gasoline and in
some circumstances may result in poorer performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline be-
fore considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica-
tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which
define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced
emissions, engine performance, and durability for your
vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gaso-
lines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are
available.
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
5
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Metha-
nol.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num-
ber. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-
mends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,
you should ask your gasoline retailer if his/her gasoline
contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than allowed in the United States. MMT is pro-
hibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines.
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives are not needed under
normal conditions and they would result in additional
cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to
the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
or damage the emission control system.
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out-of-tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as
octane enhancers, are not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives are not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
5
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
•
Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. Push in on the left side (near the
edge) of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap. If
the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
NOTE:
When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler cap door
reinforcement.
Fuel Filler Door
Gas Cap Tether Hook
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
5
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
•
A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
•
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
•
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
•
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The Malfunction Indicator Light in the in-
strument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not
secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tight-
ened each time the vehicle is refueled.
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
odometer reset button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in Section 7 of this
manual for more information.
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
If the seatbacks are folded for carrying cargo, do not
exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear
of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
•
Name of manufacturer
•
Month and year of manufacture
•
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Type of Vehicle
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
5
•
Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it
is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that
neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been
exceeded.
EXAMPLE ONLY Front
Axle
Rear Axle
Empty Weight 2054 lbs
(932 kg)
1805 lbs
(819 kg )
Load (Including driver, pas-
sengers, and cargo)
271 lbs
(123 kg)
579 lbs
(263 kg)
Total 2325 lbs
(1055 kg)
2384 lbs
(1081 kg)
GAWR 2546 lbs
(1155 kg)
2708 lbs
(1228 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
5
NOTE:
Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” at-
tached to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWRs. This table is only an example.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables, and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition. The recom-
mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings in-
clude a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a
driver).
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
Tongue weight (TW) is the downward force exerted on
the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases, it should not be
less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You
must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
Frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width
of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
5
WARNING!
•
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling, stability,
braking performance, and could result in an acci-
dent.
•
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-
ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with
your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable
Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional infor-
mation.
Weight Distributing Hitch System
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized dealer for
package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” chart for the Max. GTW towable for
your given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Class Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
5
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
2.7L Automatic 22 SQ. FT. (2.04 square
meters)
Up to 2 persons & Lug-
gage 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
22 SQ. FT. (2.04 square
meters)
Up to 3 persons & Lug-
gage 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
22 SQ. FT. (2.04 square
meters)
Up to 4 persons & Lug-
gage 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
22 SQ. FT. (2.04 square
meters)
Up to 5 persons & NO
Luggage 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
3.5L & 5.7L Automatic 32 SQ. FT. (2.97 square
meters)
Up to 2 persons & Lug-
gage 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
32 SQ. FT. (2.97 square
meters)
Up to 3 persons & Lug-
gage 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
32 SQ. FT. (2.97 square
meters)
Up to 4 persons & Lug-
gage 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg)
32 SQ. FT. (2.97 square
meters)
Up to 5 persons & NO
Luggage 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire
and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire–Safety
Information” in this section.
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information”
placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
5
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv-
etrain components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage
your vehicle.
•
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
•
When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause
a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspen-
sion, chassis structure, or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
P for Park. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements — Tires
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires–General Information” in this section for infor-
mation on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation
procedures.
−
Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
−
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires–General Infor-
mation” in this section for information on tread wear
indicators and for the proper inspection procedure.
−
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires–General Informa-
tion” in this section for information on replacement
tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limits.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
5
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes, and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing, you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may includea4and7pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
4 - Pin Connector
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
5
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “3” range
should be selected.
NOTE:
Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule “B” in
section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change
intervals.
NOTE:
Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
−
Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
7 - Pin Connector
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips — Autostick威 (If Equipped)
−
For vehicles equipped with Autostick.威 By using the
Autostick威 modes, and selecting a specific gear range,
frequent shifting can be avoided. The highest gear
range should be selected that allows for adequate
performance. For example, choose “4” if the desired
speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if needed
to maintain the desired speed.
−
Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to
prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at
high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle
speed when road conditions and RPM level allows.
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, put transmission in
neutral and increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
−
Refer to “Cooling System” under “Maintenance Pro-
cedures” in Section 7 of this manual for more informa-
tion.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
ground)
Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended.
NOTE:
If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all
four wheels are off the ground.
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher
.................312
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats
................312
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing
...............314
▫ Preparations For Jacking ................314
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ..........315
▫ Jacking And Changing a Tire .............317
▫ Compact Spare Tire ....................320
▫ Wheel Cover Installation (If Required) ......321
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures
................322
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle
.................324
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle
...............325
▫ Without The Ignition Key ...............325
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) ............................325
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
With A Tow Dolly .....................326
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of the
instrument panel between the center air outlets.
To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers, depress the
switch on the instrument panel. When the Hazard Warn-
ing is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on
and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is OFF.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flash-
ers may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
•
On the highways — Slow down.
•
In city traffic — While stopped, put transmission in
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
Hazard Flasher Switch
312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
the fan control to HI. This allows the heater core to act as
a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of this
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313
6
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
2. Set the parking brake and place the gear selector in
PARK.
3. Turn OFF the ignition.
4. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
Hazard Flasher Switch
314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
NOTE:
The spare tire must be removed in order to
access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Opening The Access Panel
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315
6
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
Spare Tire Fastener
Jack Fastener
316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking and Changing a Tire
1. Block the wheel diagonally
opposite the flat tire. Passengers
should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
2. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
3. If equipped with steel wheels, do not remove the
wheel cover at this time. If equipped with aluminum
wheels, before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
pry the center cap off carefully.
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with the metal
edges and retention teeth.
Center Cap Removal
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317
6
4. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counter-clockwise one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
5. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Engagement Locations
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319
6
6. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
7. Remove the lug nuts, wheel cover (if equipped), and
tire. Remove the cover by hand. Do not pry it off.
8. Mount the spare tire. For vehicles equipped with
wheel covers, refer to “Wheel Cover Installation.” Do not
attempt to install a wheel cover on a compact spare.
9. Tighten all the lug nuts on the mounting studs.
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counter-clockwise.
11. Fully tighten the lug nuts. Torque the wheel lug nuts
to 100 ft/lb. (135 N. m).
12. Store the flat tire, jack, and tools.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
Compact Spare Tire
The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use
with radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
•
Keep tire inflated to 60 PSI (414 KPa) Cold Inflation
Pressure.
•
Avoid driving more than 50 miles (80 km) before
replacing tire and wheel.
•
This tire is designed as an emergency spare only. Do
not exceed 50 MPH (80 km/h) speed.
320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Wheel Cover Installation (If Required)
1. Tighten the two lug nuts on the mounting studs on
each side of the stud, which is in alignment with the
valve stem.
2. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel.
3. Install the cover by hand, snapping the cover over the
two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to
install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts.
5. Return to Step 9 of the “Jacking and Changing a Tire”
procedure.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321
6
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the
hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is on.
You can be hurt by the fan.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started.
Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot
be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite and
damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a
discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from another vehicle. This type of start can be danger-
ous if done improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow
battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, or clothing. Don’t lean
over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to
touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush
contaminated area immediately with large quantities of
water.
• A battery generates hydrogen gas, which is flammable and
explosive. Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes.
• Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source
with an output that exceeds 12 volts.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not
be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery
of the same type (vented).
NOTE:
The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach, but
do not allow the vehicles to touch one another.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
3. Set the parking brake, place the automatic transmis-
sion in PARK, and turn the ignition switch to the OFF (or
LOCK) position on both vehicles.
4. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal loads.
322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote
jump-start positive battery post (+) in the engine com-
partment. Connect the other end of the same cable to the
positive terminal of the booster battery. Refer to the
following illustration for jump-starting connections.
6. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine ground (-)
of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure
you have a good contact on the engine ground. Refer to
the following illustration for jump-starting connections.
WARNING!
•
You should not try to start your vehicle by push-
ing or towing.
•
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of
the discharge battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode.
•
During cold weather when temperatures are be-
low freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought up above
freezing point before attempting jump-start.
7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery. Let the engine idle a few minutes. Then, start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with ESP, refer to ⬙Syn-
chronizing ESP⬙ under ⬙Electronic Stability Program⬙ in
Section 5 of this manual if the ESP/BAS light (in the
instrument cluster) remains on continuously after start-
ing the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Jump-Starting
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323
6
8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting
out the battery vent;
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse
and Drive. Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective.
NOTE:
Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
— if equipped, or Traction Control System (TCS) — if
equipped before rocking the vehicle. For details, refer to
“Electronic Stability Program,” or “Traction Control Sys-
tem” in this manual.
324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be-
tween “First” and R (Reverse), do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
•
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and don’t
let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
WITHOUT THE IGNITION KEY
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only ap-
proved method of towing without the ignition key is
with a flat bed truck. Proper towing equipment is neces-
sary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
ground)
Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, is only permitted within the following
limitations:
With The Ignition Key
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi-
tions: The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the
distance to be traveled must not exceed 30 miles (48 km),
and the towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325
6
km/h). Exceeding these towing limits may cause a trans-
mission geartrain failure. If the transmission is not op-
erative, or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles
(48 km), the vehicle must be transported using a flat bed
truck.
CAUTION!
•
Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
•
If the transmission is not operative, or if the
vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles (48 km),
then the only approved method of towing is with
a flat bed truck. Damage to the transmission may
result.
•
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal, and fascia will occur.
•
Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
mission may result.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON position,
not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the transmis-
sion remains in NEUTRAL.
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLY
The manufacture does not recommend that you tow this
vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
326 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 2.7L Engine Compartment
...............329
䡵 3.5L Engine Compartment
...............330
䡵 5.7L Engine Compartment
...............331
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II
......332
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap ..................332
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs
............................333
䡵 Replacement Parts
.....................334
䡵 Dealer Service
........................334
䡵 Maintenance Procedures
.................335
▫ Engine Oil ..........................335
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................340
▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension . .340
▫ Spark Plugs .........................340
▫ lp;&-2qEngine Air Cleaner Filter ...........341
▫ Fuel Filter ..........................341
▫ Catalytic Converter ....................341
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ................343
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............344
▫ A/C Air Filter — If Equipped ............345
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check ............346
▫ Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints ........346
▫ Steering Linkage ......................346
▫ Body Lubrication .....................346
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ................347
7
▫ Windshield Washers/Headlight Washers — If
Equipped ...........................347
▫ Exhaust System ......................348
▫ Cooling System .......................349
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses .......353
▫ Fuel System .........................354
▫ Brake System ........................354
▫ Automatic Transmission ................356
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped .....358
▫ Front And Rear Wheel Bearings ...........358
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................359
▫ Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders —
300 Models ..........................362
▫ Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders —
300C And 300 Touring Models ............363
䡵 Fuses (Power Distribution Centers)
.........363
▫ Fuses (Front Power Distribution Center) .....363
▫ Fuses (Rear Power Distribution Center) ......366
䡵 Vehicle Storage
........................370
䡵 Replacement Bulbs
.....................371
䡵 Bulb Replacement
......................372
▫ Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight,
Park/Turn Light, Inner Park Light, And Outer
Park Light – 300 Models ................372
▫ Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight,
And Park/Turn Light – 300C .............374
▫ Backup Light, Side Marker Light, And Tail/Stop
Turn Light — 300 Models ...............376
▫ Tail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Light, And Backup
Light — 300C Models ..................378
▫ License Light ........................381
䡵 Fluids And Capacities
...................382
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts
......383
▫ Engine .............................383
▫ Chassis ............................384
328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2.7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329
7
3.5L ENGINE COMPARTMENT
330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5.7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331
7
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” on could cause further damage to the emis-
sion control system. It could also affect fuel economy
and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before
any emissions tests can be performed.
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
verter damage and power loss will soon occur. Im-
mediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
odometer reset button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states, which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333
7
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or
start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD
system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MILsymbol is on
with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level — 2.7L, 3.5L Engines
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0L) of oil when the reading
is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335
7
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Checking Oil Level — 5.7L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0L)
of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE”
range will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE”
range on these engines.
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Dipstick
336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Road conditions and your kind of driving affect the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following list to see if any apply to you.
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
•
Stop and Go driving.
•
Extensive engine idling.
•
Driving in dusty conditions.
•
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
•
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
•
Trailer towing.
•
Taxi, Police, or delivery service (commercial service).
•
Off-Road or desert operation.
NOTE:
If ANY of these apply to you, then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow schedule “B” in the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ in this manual.
If none of these applies to you, then change your engine
oil at every interval shown on schedule ⬙A⬙ in the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ in this manual.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months,
whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacture only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
MS-6395.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337
7
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacture only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.7L and 5.7L
Engines
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
partment” illustration in this section.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Multiple Displacement System (MDS).
Refer to “Multi Displacement System” under “Starting
and Operating” for details.
In areas where these grades are not generally available,
higher SAE grades may be used. Lubricants that have
both an SAE grade number and the API Certification
Symbol or ACEA category shown on the container
should be used.
Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifica-
tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.5L Engine
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for use in 3.5L
Engines within the operating temperatures shown in the
engine oil viscosity chart. SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil is
allowed for use in the 3.5L Engine during cold weather
only to improve cold weather starting.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
partment” illustration in this section.
In areas where these grades are not generally available,
higher SAE grades may be used. Lubricants that have
both an SAE grade number and the API Certification
Symbol or ACEA category shown on the container
should be used.
Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifica-
tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
10W-30 OIL VISCOSITY CHART
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339
7
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar威 Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension
Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic
tensioner. Therefore, no belt tension adjustments are
required. However, belt and belt tensioner condition
should be inspected at the specified intervals and re-
placed if required. Improper belt tension can cause belt
slippage and failure. Low generator belt tension can
cause battery failure.
At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule,
inspect belt and belt tensioner condition. Inspect belts for
evidence of cuts, cracks, glazing, or frayed cords and
replaced if there is indication of damage, which could
result in belt failure. Also, check belt routing to make sure
there is no interference between the belts and other
engine components. See your authorized dealer for ser-
vice.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-
mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-
stalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug. Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata-
lytic converter. For proper type of replacement spark
plugs, refer to the “Vehicle Emission Control Informa-
tion” label in the engine compartment.
340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
For normal driving conditions, inspect and replace the
engine air cleaner filter at the intervals shown on Sched-
ule “A.” For vehicles driven frequently in dusty or under
severe conditions, inspect and replace the engine air
cleaner filter at the intervals shown on Schedule “B.”
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Fuel Filter
A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at
which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.
Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the
fuel tank, filter replacement may be necessary. See your
local dealer for service.
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341
7
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex-
haust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact any-
thing that can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this should occur,
safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop, shut the
engine off, and allow the vehicle to cool. Thereafter,
obtain service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s
specifications immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the MAINTENANCE-FREE battery is perma-
nently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is
periodic maintenance required.
NOTE:
The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
Battery Location
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343
7
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Don’t lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
•
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar-
bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro-
tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, and Refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation. To
replace the filter remove the access door in the cowl
screen by pressing the retaining clips. Slide the lid on the
filter adapter forward and down and remove used filter.
Install new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of
airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle (text and
arrows on the filter indicate this).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345
7
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in this manual for
the recommended air conditioning filter replacement
intervals.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints
The suspension ball joints should be inspected for exter-
nal leakage or damage when other maintenance is per-
formed.
Steering Linkage
The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for
external leakage or damage when other maintenance is
performed.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including seat tracks,
door hinges, trunk hinges, and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism,
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock
Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock
cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accu-
mulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Windshield Washers/Headlight Washers — If
Equipped
The windshield washer and the headlight washer (if
equipped) share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid
reservoir is located in the front of the engine compart-
ment on the passenger side of the vehicle. Be sure to
check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals.
Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few
seconds to flush out the residual water.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of
washer fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid”
appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347
7
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Exhaust Gas” in the “Safety Tips” section of this
manual.
348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE-
MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349
7
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, and Refill
The system should be drained, flushed, and refilled at the
intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedule.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Selection of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” for the
correct coolant type.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT
engine coolants, may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT
coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the speci-
fied coolant as soon as possible.
•
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol-base
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propy-
lene Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles (160
000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you
use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
When adding coolant:
•
The manufacturer recommends using Mopar威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology).
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
anticipated.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:
Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351
7
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine off and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle
should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
•
If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine, which contains
aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
•
Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Hoses and Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose
routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any
heat source or moving component, which may cause heat
damage or mechanical wear.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353
7
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.
Fuel System
The Electronic Fuel Injection high-pressure fuel system’s
hoses and quick connect fittings have unique material
characteristics that provide adequate sealing and resist
attack by deteriorated gasoline.
You are urged to use only the manufacture specified
hoses with quick connect fittings, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing. It
is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick
connect fittings that have been removed during service.
Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings
to insure they are properly installed and fully connected.
See your authorized dealer for service.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the “Mainte-
nance Schedule” in this manual.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake and Power Steering Hoses
When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance,
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling
indicate deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention
should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest
to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.
354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
NOTE:
•
Often, fluid such as oil, power steering fluid, and
brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations
to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings. There-
fore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not
necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping
of hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during
vehicle operation), should be noted before a hose is
replaced based on leakage.
•
Inspect the brake hoses whenever the brake system is
serviced and at every engine oil change. Inspect hy-
draulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing, or
worn spots. If there is any evidence of cracking,
scuffing, or worn spots, the hose should be replaced
immediately! Eventual deterioration of the hose can
take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure.
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Master Cylinder - Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-
ure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
forming underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355
7
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” for the
correct fluid type.
WARNING!
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
•
Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling
point than the recommended MOPAR威 DOT 3
product or a brake fluid that is unidentified as to
FMVSS specification may result in sudden brake
failure during hard prolonged braking. You could
have an accident.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid, all brake seal components could be
damaged causing partial or complete brake failure.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not
required. For this reason, the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have
your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.
356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-
facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-
ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufac-
turer will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” for the correct fluid type.
•
The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,
visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe
damage to the transmission may occur. Your au-
thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the
fluid level accurately.
Fluid and Filter Changes
Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed as follows:
Normal Usage — No change necessary
Severe Usage (fluid and filter) — Refer to Maintenance
Schedule “B”
Severe Usage is defined as:
•
Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
fluid and filter should be changed.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357
7
All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped
The all wheel drive system consists of a Transfer Case
and Front Differential. The exterior surface of these
components should be inspected for evidence of fluid
leaks. Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as
possible.
The transfer case fluid inspection plug is located in the
middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer case
fluid level, remove the inspection plug. The fluid level
should be even with the bottom of the hole. The transfer
case fill plug is located on the rear housing near the
output shaft.
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer
cover near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differ-
ential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level
should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the
hole.
Fluid Changes
The fluid should be changed as follows:
Normal Usage
Front Differential No Service Required
Transfer Case Refer to Maintenance
Schedule “A”
Severe Usage
Front Differential No Service Required
Transfer Case Refer to Maintenance
Schedule “B”
Severe Usage is defined as:
1. More than 50% of vehicle operation in stop and go
traffic where vehicle is driven regularly for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, such as in heavy city or
in construction zone traffic.
2. Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
trailer towing where the vehicle driven regularly for
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
Front and Rear Wheel Bearings
Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed.
No regular maintenance is required for these compo-
nents.
358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap, and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using Mopar威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
•
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
•
Use Mopar威 Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359
7
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause, which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use Mopar威 touch up paint or equivalent on scratches
as soon as possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use Mopar威
Wheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only
Mopar威or equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven
cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’
protective finish.
360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Care
Use Mopar威 Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and Mopar威 Carpet Cleaner for carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, or Mopar威 Satin Select. Do not use harsh cleaners
or Armorall. Use Mopar威 Total Clean to clean vinyl
upholstery.
Mopar威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361
7
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments, which may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild
soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar威 Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning the Center Console Cup Holders — 300
Models
Perform the following steps to clean the center console
cup holders:
•
Grab the center of the rubber portion of the cup holder
firmly and lift upward to remove.
•
Soak the rubber cup holder liner in a mixture of
medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid
dish soap. Let soak for approximately one hour.
•
After one hour pull the liner from the water and dip it
back into the water about six times. This will loosen
any remaining debris.
•
Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water.
Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the
outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth.
362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Carefully tuck the front, followed by the rear, then side
edges of the cup holder into the center console.
Cleaning the Center Console Cup Holders —
300C and 300 Touring Models
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cup holder in the center console.
NOTE:
The cup holder cannot be removed.
FUSES (POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTERS)
Fuses (Front Power Distribution Center)
A power distribution center is located in the engine
compartment. This center contains fuses and relays.
Front Power Distribution Center
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363
7
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
1 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Left High Intensity Dis-
charge (HID) Headlight
- if equipped
2 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Right High Intensity
Discharge (HID) Head-
light - if equipped
3 — 15 Amp
Blue
Adjustable Pedals - if
equipped
4 — 20 Amp
Yellow
AC Clutch/Horn
5 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Headlight Washer - If
Equipped
6 — 15 Amp
Blue
Front Control Module
(FCM)
7 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Fog Lights - if equipped
8 — 15 Amp
Blue
Lights – License, Park,
Side Marker, Stop, Turn
9 — 15 Amp
Blue
Front Control Module
(FCM)
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
10 — 5 Amp
Orange
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)/Starter
11 — 25 Amp
Clear
Auto Shutdown/
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
12———
13———
14 — 25 Amp
Clear
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
15 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Injectors, Ignition Coils
16———
17 30 Amp
Pink
— Anti-lock Brakes System
(ABS) Valves - if
equipped/Powertrain
Control Module (PCM)
18 30 Amp
Pink
— Windshield Wiper/
Washer
364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
19 50 Amp
Red
— Radiator Fan
20 20 Amp
Blue
— Starter
21 50 Amp
Red
— Anti-lock Brakes System
(ABS) Pump Motor - if
equipped
22 40 Amp
Green
— AC Clutch/Radiator Fan
High — Low
23 50 Amp
Red
— High Intensity Lighting
(HID) - if equipped
24 60 Amp
Yellow
— Radiator Fan - AWD
25 30 Amp
Pink
— Front Control Module
(FCM)
26 20 Amp
Blue
— Transmission - RLE
27 30 Amp
Pink
— Front Control Module
(FCM)
CAUTION!
•
When installing the Power Distribution Center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Power Distribu-
tion Center, and possibly result in an electrical
system failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than
indicated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse contin-
ues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365
7
Fuses (Rear Power Distribution Center)
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Opening The Access Panel
Rear Power Distribution Center
366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
1 60 Amp
Yellow
— Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
2 40 Amp
Green
— Battery
3———
4 40 Amp
Green
— Battery
5 30 Amp
Pink
— Heated Seats - if
equipped
6 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump
7———
8 — 15 Amp
Blue
Ignition Switch/Airbag
Control Module (ACM)
9 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Console Power Outlet
10———
11 * ———
12 * ———
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
13 * ———
14 — 10 Amp
Red
AC Heater Control/
Cluster/Sentry Key Re-
mote Keyless Entry
15 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow Brake Mod-
ule - if equipped
16———
17 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Cluster
18 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Selectable Power Outlet
19 — 10 Amp
Red
Stop Lights
20———
21———
22———
23———
24———
25———
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367
7
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
26———
27 — 10 Amp
Red
Airbag/Airbag Control
Module (ACM)
28 — 10 Amp
Red
Curtain Airbag - if
equipped
29 — 5 Amp
Orange
Anti-lock Brakes Module
- if equipped/Cluster/
Front Control Module
(FCM)/Powertrain Con-
trol Module (PCM)/
Sentry Key Remote Key-
less Entry/Stop Lights
30 — 10 Amp
Red
Door Modules/Power
Mirrors - if equipped/
Steering Control Module
31———
32———
33———
34———
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
35 — 5 Amp
Orange
Amplifier - if equipped/
Antenna/Ignition
Delay/Overhead
Console/Passenger Door
Lock & Express Power
Window Switch - if
equipped/Power Mir-
rors - if equipped/Rain
Sensor - if equipped/
Rear Defrost
36 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Hands Free Phone - if
equipped/Media System
Monitor DVD - if
equipped/Radio/
Satellite Receiver - if
equipped
37 — 15 Amp
Blue
Transmission - NAG1
38 — 5 Amp
Orange
Analog Clock/Cargo
Light/Overhead Con-
sole
368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Car-
tridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
39 — 10 Amp
Red
Heated Mirrors - if
equipped
40 — 5 Amp
Orange
Heated Seats - if
equipped/Inside Rear-
view Mirror
41 — 10 Amp
Red
AC Heater Control/Park
Assist - if equipped/Tire
Pressure Monitoring - if
equipped
42 30 Amp
Pink
— Front Blower Motor
43 30 Amp
Pink
— Amplifier - if equipped/
Antenna/Rear Defrost
44 20 Amp
Blue
— Amplifier - if equipped/
Front Control Module
(FCM)/Sunroof - if
equipped
*Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses (circuit
breakers) that are only serviceable by an authorized
dealer. The Cluster (without power memory seat), the
Driver Seat Switch (with power memory seat), and the
Memory Module (if equipped) are fused by the 25 amp
circuit breaker in Cavity 11. The Passenger Seat Switch is
fused by the 25 amp circuit breaker in Cavity 12. The
Door Modules (except base), the Driver Door Lock
Switch (base), the Driver Express Power Window Switch
(if equipped), and the Passenger Door Lock Switch (base)
are fused by the 25 amp circuit breaker in Cavity 13. If
you experience temporary or permanent loss of these
systems, see your authorized dealer for service.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369
7
CAUTION!
•
When installing the Power Distribution Center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Power Distribu-
tion Center, and possibly result in an electrical
system failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than
indicated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse contin-
ues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
•
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
•
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights..............W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Light .............579
Overhead Console Reading Lights.............578
Visor Vanity Lights .....................A6220
Glove Box Light .........................194
Door Courtesy ..........................562
Shift Indicator Light .................JKLE14140
NOTE:
For lighted switches, see your dealer for re-
placement instructions.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior
(300, 300 Touring Models) Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlight .....................9006
High Beam Headlight.....................9005
Front Park/Turn Light ..................3757AK
Front Inner Park Light ..................194NA
Front Outer Park Light ..................194NA
Front Fog Light—If Equipped............9145/H10
(Serviced at Dealer)
Front Sidemarker .........W5W(Serviced at Dealer)
Tail/Stop/Turn Light .....................3057
Rear Sidemarker .........................168
Backup Light...........................3057
Center High Mount Stop Light (CHMSL) .......LED
License................................168
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior
(300C Models) Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlight (Standard Halogen).....9006XS
Low Beam Headlight – High Intensity Discharge
(HID) ..................D1S(Serviced at Dealer)
High Beam Headlight.....................9005
Front Park/Turn Light ..................3157AK
Front Fog Light........9145/H10 (Serviced at Dealer)
Front Sidemarker .........W5W(Serviced at Dealer)
Tail/Stop Light .........................3057
Tail Light .............................3057
Turn Signal Light........................3057
Backup Light...........................3057
Center High Mount Stop Light (CHMSL) .......LED
Outside Mirror Turn Signal & Approach Lights...LED
License ..............................W5W
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371
7
BULB REPLACEMENT
Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight,
Park/Turn Light, Inner Park Light, and Outer Park
Light – 300 Models
1. Open the hood.
NOTE:
Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight assem-
bly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly
counter-clockwise, and then pull it out of the headlight
assembly.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly.
4. Push the replacement bulb into the socket assembly.
5. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head-
light assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
1 — High Beam Headlight Bulb
2 — Low Beam Headlight Bulb
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3 — Park/Turn Light Bulb 4 — Inner Park Light Bulb
5 — Outer Park Light Bulb
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
7
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, and
Park/Turn Light – 300C
High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID) — If
Equipped
The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlight switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb
yourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights when the
headlight switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop-
erly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis-
charge Headlights (HID), when the headlights are turned
on, there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as
the system charges.
1. Open the hood.
NOTE:
Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight assem-
bly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly
counter-clockwise, and then pull it out of the headlight
assembly.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly.
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Push the replacement bulb into the socket assembly.
5. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head-
light assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
1 — Low Beam Headlight Bulb
2 — High Beam Headlight Bulb
3 — Park/Turn Light Bulb
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
7
Backup Light, Side Marker Light, and Tail/Stop
Turn Light — 300 Models
1. Open the Trunk.
2. Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail light
assembly.
3. Pull back the trunk liner.
4. Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the
tail light assembly.
5. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
7. Pull the tail light assembly clear from the vehicle to
access the bulbs.
8. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly
counter-clockwise to remove it from the tail light assem-
bly.
1 — Backup Light Bulb
2 — Side Marker Light Bulb
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
7
9. Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly.
10. Push the replacement bulb into the socket assembly.
11. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail
light assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
12. Reinstall the tail light assembly, fasteners, electrical
connector, and trunk liner.
13. Close the trunk.
Tail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Light, and Backup
Light — 300C Models
1. Open the Trunk.
2. Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail light
assembly.
3 — Tail/Stop/Turn Light Bulb
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull back the trunk liner.
4. Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the
tail light assembly.
5. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
7. Pull the tail light assembly clear from the vehicle to
access the bulbs. Turn bulb sockets counter-clockwise to
remove.
8. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly
counter-clockwise to remove it from the tail light assem-
bly.
1 — Tail/Stop Light Bulb
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
7
2 — Tail Light Bulb 3 — Turn Signal Light Bulb
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
9. Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly.
10. Push the replacement bulb into the socket assembly.
11. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail
light assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
12. Reinstall the tail light assembly, fasteners, electrical
connector, and trunk liner.
13. Close the trunk.
License Light
1. Remove the screws securing the light to the rear fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly.
4. Push the replacement bulb into the socket assembly.
5. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
6. Reattach the light to the rear fascia, and then install the
screws.
4 — Backup Light Bulb
1 — License Light Bulb
2 — Socket
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
7
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (approximate)
2.7 Liter Engine 18 gal-
lons
68 liters
3.5 Liter Engine 18 gal-
lons
68 liters
5.7 Liter Engine 19 gal-
lons
72 liters
Engine Oil with Filter
2.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20,
API Certified)
6.0 qts. 5.7 liters
3.5 Liter Engine (SAE 10W-30,
API Certified)
6.0 qts. 5.7 liters
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20,
API Certified)
7.0 qts. 6.6 liters
Cooling System *
2.7 Liter Engine (Mopar威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula) or
equivalent.
9.9 qts 9.4 liters
3.5 Liter Engine without All
Wheel Drive (Mopar威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula) or
equivalent.
11.1 qts 10.5 li-
ters
3.5 Liter Engine with All Wheel
Drive (Mopar威 Antifreeze/
Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula) or equivalent.
11.4 qts 10.8 li-
ters
5.7 Liter Engine without Severe
Duty II Cooling System (Mopar威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula) or
equivalent.
14.7 qts 13.9 li-
ters
5.7 Liter Engine with Severe
Duty II Cooling System (Mopar威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula) or
equivalent.
15.1 qts 14.3 li-
ters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to
MAX level.
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology) or equivalent
Engine Oil (2.7 Liter) Use API Certified engine oil. SAE 5W-20 is recommended. Refer to the engine oil
fill cap for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-
6395.
Engine Oil (3.5 Liter) Use API Certified engine oil. SAE 10W-30 is recommended. Refer to the engine oil
viscosity chart for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-6395.
Engine Oil (5.7 Liter) Use API Certified engine oil. SAE 5W-20 is recommended. Refer to the engine oil
fill cap for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-
6395.
Oil Filter (2.7 Liter) Mopar威 05281090 or equivalent.
Oil Filter (3.5 Liter) Mopar威 05281090 or equivalent.
Oil Filter (5.7 Liter) Mopar威 05281090 or equivalent.
Spark Plugs Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine compartment.
Fuel Selection (2.7 Liter) 87 Octane
Fuel Selection (3.5 Liter) 87 to 89 Octane
Fuel Selection (5.7 Liter) 87 to 89 Octane
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383
7
Chassis
Component Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
Automatic Transmission Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder Mopar威 DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids.
Front Axle API Certified GL-5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Power Steering Reservoir Mopar威 Power Steering Fluid + 4, Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
Rear Axle API Certified GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Transfer Case Mopar威 Transfer Case Lubricant LX, P/N 05170055AA, or equivalent.
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
control system. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE:
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the
emission control devices and systems on your vehicle
may be performed by any automotive repair establish-
ment or individual using any automotive part, which has
been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of
California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE:
•
For vehicles equipped with a 2.7L engine, follow
Schedule “A” or “B” from 0 to 150,000 miles
(0 to 250 000 km).
•
For vehicles equipped with a 3.5L or 5.7L engine,
follow Schedule “A”
or “B” from 0 to 120,000 miles
(0 to 200 000 km).
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule “B.” It is for vehicles that are operated
under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every
60,000 miles (100 000 km) if the vehicle is usually
operated under one or more of the conditions marked
with an 〫.
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
•
Stop and go driving.
386 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
•
Extensive engine idling.
•
Driving in dusty conditions.
•
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
•
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
•
Trailer towing.〫
•
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser-
vice).〫
•
Off-road or desert operation.
NOTE:
If ANY of these apply to you, then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow the maintenance rec-
ommendations in Schedule “B” in this section.
NOTE:
If ANY of these apply to you, then flush and
replace the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow the
maintenance recommendations in Schedule “B” in this
section.
NOTE:
Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule ⬙B.⬙
Second is Schedule “A.” It is for vehicles that are not
operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched-
ule ⬙B.⬙
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi-
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 387
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once a Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery, and clean, and tighten the termi-
nals as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir and brake
master cylinder, and add as needed.
•
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
•
Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for
proper fit.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the exhaust system.
•
Inspect the brake hoses.
•
Inspect the CV joints and front and rear suspension
components.
•
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
388 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
SCHEDULE “B”
Follow Schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every
60,000 miles (100 000 km) if the vehicle is usually
operated under one or more of the conditions marked
with an 〫.
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
•
Stop and go driving.
•
Extensive engine idling.
•
Driving in dusty conditions.
•
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
•
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
•
Trailer towing.〫
•
Taxi, police or delivery service (commercial ser-
vices).〫
•
Off-road or desert operation.
NOTE:
If ANY of these apply to you, then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow the maintenance rec-
ommendations in Schedule “B” in this section.
NOTE:
If ANY of these apply to you, then flush and
replace the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow the
maintenance recommendations in Schedule “B” in this
section.
SCHEDULE “B” 389
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 3,000 6,000 9,000 12,000 15,000 18,000
(Kilometers) (5 000) (10 000) (15 000) (20 000) (25 000) (30 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
XXXXX X
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-
quired.*
XXXX X
Replace the air cleaner filter. X*
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X
Rotate the tires. X X X
390 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000
(Kilometers) (35 000) (40 000) (45 000) (50 000) (55 000) (60 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
XXXXX X
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-
quired.*
XXX X X
Replace the air cleaner filter. X
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine. X
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
XX
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. *
X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X
Rotate the tires. X X X
SCHEDULE “B” 391
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 39,000 42,000 45,000 48,000 51,000 54,000
(Kilometers) (65 000) (70 000) (75 000) (80 000) (85 000) (90 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
XXXXX X
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-
quired.*
XX XX X
Replace the air cleaner filter. X*
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
X
Change the rear axle fluid. X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X
Rotate the tires. X X X
Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All Wheel
Drive (AWD) only.
X
392 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 57,000 60,000 63,000 66,000 69,000 72,000
(Kilometers) (95 000) (100 000) (105 000) (110 000) (115 000) (120 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
XXXXX X
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-
quired.*
X XXX X
Replace the air cleaner filter. X
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine. X
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
XX
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt
and tensioner. Replace if required.
X
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. *‡
X
Change the automatic transmission fluid and
filter.
X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months
if not done at 102,000 miles.
X
Rotate the tires. X X X
SCHEDULE “B” 393
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 75,000 78,000 81,000 84,000 87,000 90,000
(Kilometers) (125 000) (130 000) (135 000) (140 000) (145 000) (150 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
XXXXX X
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-
quired.*
XXXX
Replace the air cleaner filter. X* X
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine. X
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
X
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. *‡
X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X
Rotate the tires. X X X
394 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 93,000 96,000 99,000 102,000 105,000
(Kilometers) (155 000) (160 000) (165 000) (170 000) (175 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re-
placed at 3 months.
XXXXX
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-
quired.*
XXXX
Replace the air cleaner filter. X*
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors. X
Replace the engine timing belt. 3.5L Engine. X
Replace the spark plugs. 2.7L, 3.5L Engines. X
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and ten-
sioner. Replace if required.
X
Change the rear axle fluid. X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X
Flush and replace engine coolant at 102,000 miles if
not done at 60 months.
X
Rotate the tires. X X
Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) only.
X
SCHEDULE “B” 395
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 108,000 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000
(Kilometers) (180 000) (185 000) (190 000) (195 000) (200 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re-
placed at 3 months.
XXXXX
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-
quired.*
XXXX
Replace the air cleaner filter. X
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors. X X
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine. X
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *X
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter. X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months,
if not replaced at 102,000 miles.
X
Rotate the tires. X X X
396 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 123,000 126,000 129,000 132,000 135,000
(Kilometers) (205 000) (210 000) (215 000) (220 000) (225 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re-
placed at 3 months.
XXXXX
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-
quired.*
XXXX
Replace the air cleaner filter. X*
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors. X
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and ten-
sioner. Replace if required.
X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X
Rotate the tires. X X
SCHEDULE “B” 397
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 138,000 141,000 144,000 147,000 150,000
(Kilometers) (230 000) (235 000) (240 000) (245 000) (250 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re-
placed at 3 months.
XXXXX
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-
quired.*
XXXX
Replace the air cleaner filter. X
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors. X
Change the rear axle fluid. X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X
Rotate the tires. X X X
Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) only.
X
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-
sions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
398 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000
(Kilometers) (10 000) (20 000) (30 000) (40 000) (50 000) (60 000)
[Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30] [36]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X XXXXX
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-
quired.*
X XXX X
Replace the air cleaner filter. X
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine. X
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
XX
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X
Rotate the tires. X XXXXX
SCHEDULE “A” 399
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000 72,000
(Kilometers) (70 000) (80 000) (90 000) (100 000) (110 000) (120 000)
[Months] [42] [48] [54] [60] [66] [72]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if
required.*
XXX XX
Replace the air cleaner filter. X
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
XX
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine. X
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt
and tensioner. Replace if required.
X
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months
if not done at 102,000 miles.
X
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. *
X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X
Rotate the tires. X X X X X X
Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All Wheel
Drive (AWD) only.
X
400 SCHEDULE “A”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 102,000
(Kilometers) (130 000) (140 000) (150 000) (160 000) (170 000)
[Months] [78] [84] [90] [96] [102]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-
quired.*
XX XX
Replace the air cleaner filter. X
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors. X
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and ten-
sioner. Replace if required.
X
Replace the spark plugs. 2.7L, 3.5L Engines. X
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine. X
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *‡ X
Replace the engine timing belt. 3.5L Engine. X
Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) only.
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 102,000
miles if not done at 60 months.
X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X
Rotate the tires. X X X X X
SCHEDULE “A” 401
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 108,000 114,000 120,000 126,000 132,000
(Kilometers) (180 000) (190 000) (200 000) (210 000) (220 000)
[Months] [108] [114] [120] [126] [132]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re-
quired.*
XX XX
Replace the air cleaner filter. X
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors. X X
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine. X
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and ten-
sioner. Replace if required.
X
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120
months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles.
X
Rotate the tires. X X X X X
402 SCHEDULE “A”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 138,000 144,000 150,000
(Kilometers) (230 000) (240 000) (250 000)
[Months] [138] [144] [150]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.* X X
Replace the air cleaner filter. X
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors. X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X
Rotate the tires. X X X
Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All Wheel Drive (AWD) only. X
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-
sions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
SCHEDULE “A” 403
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle
..............................406
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ............406
▫ Prepare A List ........................406
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............406
䡵 If You Need Assistance
..................406
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only)
...408
䡵 Mopar威 Parts
.........................408
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects
.................409
▫ In Canada ..........................409
䡵 Publication Order Forms
.................409
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades
........................410
▫ Treadwear ..........................411
▫ Traction Grades ......................411
▫ Temperature Grades ...................411
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-
pointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
406 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
•
If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Dealership name
•
Vehicle identification number
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer
Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 407
9
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na-
tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
er’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
408 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.NHTSA.gov. or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of Transportation, Washington DC
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE:
A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 409
9
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, dia-
grams, and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
Call Toll Free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
•
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories estab-
lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
410 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 411
9
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
412 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) .............253
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control) ........................121
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .........351
Adding Fuel ..........................293
Adding Washer Fluid ..............112,114,347
Adjustable Pedals .......................117
Air Cleaner, Engine
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ................341
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..............344
Air Conditioning ....................219,221
Air Conditioning Controls ................219
Air Conditioning Filter ................227,345
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ...........228
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ...........344,345
Air Conditioning System ...........219,221,344
Air Pressure, Tires ...................169,272
Airbag ................................41
Airbag Deployment ....................45,47
Airbag Light ....................46,49,60,165
Airbag Maintenance ......................48
Airbag, Side ...........................46
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ...........42,46
Alarm (Security Alarm) ..................168
Alarm System (Security Alarm) .............15
Alignment and Balance ..................278
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ...............250,358
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ............7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ..................214
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .........350,351,382
Disposal ............................352
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............253
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..............164,255
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ......15
Anti-Theft System ......................168
Appearance Care .......................359
Auto Down Power Windows ...............28
Auto Up Power Windows .................28
Automatic Dimming Mirror ................68
Automatic Door Locks ..................24,25
Automatic Headlights ...................103
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......221
Automatic Transaxle
Special Additives .....................357
Automatic Transmission .........240,245,356,357
Adding Fluid .....................
357,384
414 INDEX
Autostick ...........................249
Fluid and Filter Changes ................357
Fluid Change ........................357
Fluid Level Check .....................356
Fluid Type ..........................384
Gear Ranges .........................241
Shifting ..........................240,245
Special Additives .....................357
Torque Converter .....................243
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . 244
Autostick ..........................247,249
Ball Joints ............................346
Battery ...............................343
Emergency Starting ....................322
Jump Starting ........................322
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .....21
Location .........................322,343
Bearings ..............................358
Belts, Drive ...........................340
Belts, Seat .............................33
Body Mechanism Lubrication ..............346
B-Pillar Location .......................267
Brake Assist System .....................258
Brake, Parking .........................251
Brake System .......................253,354
Anti-Lock (ABS) ......................253
Fluid Check ......................355,384
Hoses ..............................354
Master Cylinder ......................355
Parking ............................251
Warning Light ....................165,253
Brakes ...............................253
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..............240
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ......58
Bulb Replacement ......................372
Bulbs, Light ...........................371
Calibration, Compass ....................178
Capacities, Fluid .......................382
Caps, Filler
Fuel ...............................293
Oil (Engine) ......................338,339
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..............351
Car Washes ...........................359
Carbon Monoxide Warning .............59,292
INDEX 415
10
Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance .......217
Catalytic Converter .....................341
CD (Compact Disc) Player .............188,195
Cellular Phone ..........................72
Chains, Tire ...........................279
Changing A Flat Tire ....................314
Chart, Tire Sizing .......................264
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ..............333
Child Restraint ...................50,52,55,56
Child Restraint Tether Anchors ...........54,55
Child Safety Locks .......................25
Clean Air Gasoline ......................290
Cleaning
Wheels .............................360
Climate Control ........................219
Clock .......................186,190,196,207
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ...........218
Compact Spare Tire .....................274
Compass .............................178
Compass Calibration ....................178
Compass Variance ......................179
Computer, Trip/Travel ...................175
Console ..............................153
Console, Floor .........................153
Console, Overhead ......................140
Contract, Service .......................408
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ........351
Cooling System ........................349
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .............351
Coolant Capacity .....................382
Coolant Level .....................349,352
Disposal of Used Coolant ...............352
Drain, Flush, and Refill .................350
Inspection ...........................352
Points to Remember ...................352
Pressure Cap ........................351
Radiator Cap ........................351
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ....350,382,383
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ..........118,121
Cruise Light ...........................163
Cup Holder .....................151,362,363
Customer Assistance ....................406
Data Recorder, Event .....................49
Daytime Running Lights .................106
416 INDEX
Dealer Service .........................334
Defroster, Rear Window ..................229
Defroster, Windshield ...............61,220,225
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ...............110
Diagnostic System, Onboard ...............332
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ................107
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .............352
Door Locks ............................22
Door Locks, Automatic ...................24
Door Opener, Garage ....................141
Drive Belts ............................340
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces ..................250
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) ....210
Electric Remote Mirrors ...................70
Electrical Power Outlets ..................149
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . 118,121
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ..........259
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .....168
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 171
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck .............324
Hazard Warning Flasher ................312
Jacking .............................314
Jump Starting ........................322
Overheating .........................312
Towing .............................325
Emission Control System Maintenance ....333,386
Engine .........................329,330,331
Air Cleaner ..........................341
Block Heater .........................237
Break-In Recommendations ...............58
Checking Oil Level .................335,336
Compartment ..................329,330,331
Coolant (Antifreeze) ................349,383
Cooling ............................349
Exhaust Gas Caution ................59,292
Fails to Start .........................235
Flooded, Starting .....................235
Fuel Requirements .................289,382
Oil ..........................335,382,383
Oil Change Interval ...................337
Oil Filler Cap .....................338,339
INDEX 417
10
Oil Selection ......................337,382
Oil Synthetic .........................339
Overheating .........................312
Temperature Gauge ...................166
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .........48
Ethanol ..............................290
Event Data Recorder .....................49
Exhaust Gas Caution .............59,60,292,348
Exhaust System ......................59,348
Exterior Folding Mirrors ..................69
Exterior Lighting .......................103
Filters
Air Cleaner ..........................341
Air Conditioning ..................227,345
Engine Fuel .........................341
Engine Oil .......................340,383
Engine Oil Disposal ...................340
Flashers
Hazard Warning ......................312
Turn Signal .......................107,163
Flash-To-Pass ..........................107
Flat Tire Changing ......................314
Flooded Engine Starting ..................235
Floor Console ..........................153
Fluid Capacities ........................382
Fluid Leaks ............................61
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ..............................355
Cooling System .......................349
Engine Oil .......................335,336
Power Steering .......................346
Fluids ...............................383
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ........383
Fog Lights .........................106,163
Folding Rear Seat .......................97
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ..................324
Front Suspension Ball Joints ...............346
Front Wheel Bearings ....................358
Fuel .................................289
Adding .............................293
Clean Air ...........................290
Ethanol .............................290
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...................293
Filter ..............................341
Gasoline ............................289
418 INDEX
Gauge .............................168
Hoses ..............................354
Methanol ...........................290
Octane Rating .....................289,383
Requirements .....................289,382
Tank Capacity ........................382
Fuel System Caution ....................294
Fueling ..............................293
Fuses ................................363
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) ..........141
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ..............293,332
Gasoline, Clean Air .....................290
Gasoline (Fuel) ........................289
Gasoline, Reformulated ..................290
Gauges
Coolant Temperature ..................166
Fuel ...............................168
Speedometer .........................163
Tachometer ..........................164
Gear Ranges ..........................241
General Information ..............15,22,136,288
Glass Cleaning .........................361
Gross Axle Weight Rating ..............296,298
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ............296,298
GVWR ...............................296
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) ............72
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................312
Head Restraints .........................94
Headlight Washers ...................113,347
Headlights ............................374
Cleaning ............................361
High Beam ..........................107
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ......107
Lights On Reminder ...................106
On With Wipers ...................104,111
Passing .............................107
Switch .............................103
Time Delay ..........................105
Washers .........................113,347
Heated Mirrors .........................71
Heated Seats ...........................95
Heater ...............................219
Heater, Engine Block ....................237
INDEX 419
10
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch ...............................107
Hitches
Trailer Towing .......................301
Holder, Cup ...........................151
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener)
Transmitter ...........................141
Hood Release ..........................101
Hoses ............................353,354
Ignition ...............................11
Key ................................11
Ignition Key Removal ....................11
Illuminated Entry .......................17
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ..................13
Indicator, Traction Control ................257
Infant Restraint .......................50,51
Inflation Pressure Tires ...................169
Information Center, Vehicle ...............171
Inside Rearview Mirror ...................68
Instrument Cluster ................161,162,163
Instrument Panel and Controls .............160
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ............362
Interior Appearance Care .................361
Interior Fuses ..........................363
Interior Lights .........................108
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..........110
Introduction ............................4
Jack Location ..........................315
Jack Operation .........................317
Jacking Instructions .....................317
Jump Starting .........................322
Key, Programming .......................14
Key, Replacement .......................14
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ..................13
Key-In Reminder ........................12
Keyless Entry System .....................17
Keys .................................11
Knee Bolster ...........................41
Lane Change and Turn Signals .............107
Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................33
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . 54,55
420 INDEX
Latch Plate ............................34
Latches ...............................61
Hood ..............................101
Lead Free Gasoline ......................289
Life of Tires ...........................277
Lights .............................61,103
Airbag .......................46,49,60,165
Anti-Lock ........................164,255
Automatic Headlights ..................103
Brake Assist Warning ..................262
Brake Warning ....................165,253
Bulb Replacement .....................371
Courtesy/Reading .................108,140
Cruise .............................163
Daytime Running .....................106
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...........106,107
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator ..........................259,262
Electronic Throttle Control Warning .......168
Engine Temperature Warning ............164
Fog .............................106,163
Hazard Warning Flasher ................312
Headlight Switch .....................103
Headlights .......................103,374
Headlights On With Wipers ...........104,111
High Beam .......................107,167
High Beam Indicator ...................167
Illuminated Entry ......................17
Instrument Cluster .................103,163
Interior ..........................108,140
License .............................381
Lights On Reminder ...................106
Low Fuel ...........................163
LowTire............................169
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ......170
Oil Pressure .........................171
Passing .............................107
Reading ............................140
Seat Belt Reminder ....................168
Service ..........................371,372
Service Engine Soon
(Malfunction Indicator) .................170
SmartBeams .........................104
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .......169,281
Traction Control ......................262
Turn Signal ....................
106,107,163
INDEX 421
10
Vanity Mirror .........................71
Voltage .............................170
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 163
Load Leveling System ...................155
Loading Vehicle .....................295,297
Capacities ...........................297
Tires ...............................267
Locks ................................22
Auto Unlock .........................25
Child Protection .......................25
Door ...............................22
Power Door ..........................23
Low Tire Pressure System ................281
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) ............................54,55
Lubrication, Body .......................346
Lumbar Support ........................94
Maintenance Free Battery .................343
Maintenance Procedures ..................335
Maintenance Schedule ...................386
Schedule “A” ........................399
Schedule “B” ........................389
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine) ......................170,333
Manual, Service ........................409
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) .............98
Memory Seat ...........................98
Memory Seats and Radio ..................98
Methanol .............................290
Mini-Trip Computer .....................175
Mirrors ...............................68
Automatic Dimming ....................68
Electric Remote .......................70
Exterior Folding .......................69
Heated ..............................71
Outside .............................69
Rearview ............................68
Vanity ..............................71
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System .............281
Mopar Parts ........................334,408
MTBE/ETBE ..........................290
Multi-Displacement Engine System ..........256
Multi-Function Control Lever ..............106
422 INDEX
Navigation Radio .......................206
Navigation System ......................206
New Vehicle Break-In Period ...............58
Occupant Restraints ......................32
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .............289
Odometer ............................167
Trip ...............................167
Oil, Engine .........................335,383
Capacity ............................382
Change Interval ......................337
Checking ........................335,336
Dipstick .........................335,336
Disposal ............................340
Filter ...........................340,383
Filter Disposal .......................340
Identification Logo ....................338
Materials Added to ....................339
Recommendation ..................337,382
Synthetic ...........................339
Viscosity ......................338,339,382
Onboard Diagnostic System ............332,333
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) .........141
Operating Precautions ...................332
Outside Rearview Mirrors .................69
Overdrive ............................242
Overhead Console ......................140
Overheating, Engine ..................167,312
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .........409
Panic Alarm ...........................20
Park Assist System, Rear .................136
Parking Brake .........................251
Parking On Hill ........................251
Passing Light ..........................107
Pedals, Adjustable ......................117
Personal Settings .......................182
Pets ..................................58
Phone, Cellular .........................72
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) ............72
Placard, Tire and Loading Information .......267
Power
Brakes .............................253
Distribution Center (Fuses) ..............363
Door Locks ..........................23
Mirrors .............................70
INDEX 423
10
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ........149
Seats ...............................92
Steering .........................255,346
Steering, Checking ....................346
Sunroof ............................146
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .........116
Windows ............................27
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts .............40
Preparation for Jacking ...................314
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ............................38
Programmable Electronic Features ....142,145,182
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) .............21,142,145
Radial Ply Tires ........................274
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ........351
Radio Broadcast Signals ..................187
Radio, Navigation ......................206
Radio Operation ..................188,195,219
Radio Remote Controls ..................215
Radio, Satellite ......................207,212
Radio (Sound Systems) ................188,195
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...............111
Rear Park Assist System ..................136
Rear Seat, Folding .......................97
Rear Window Defroster ..................229
Rear Window Features ...................229
Rearview Mirrors ........................68
Reclining Front Seats .....................93
Recorder, Event Data .....................49
Recreational Towing .....................309
Reformulated Gasoline ...................290
Refrigerant ............................345
Reminder, Seat Belt ......................38
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ...............17
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ......215
Remote Trunk Release ....................31
Replacement Parts ......................334
Replacement Tires ......................277
Reporting Safety Defects .................409
Restraint, Head .........................94
Restraints, Child ........................50
Restraints, Occupant .....................32
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ..............324
Rotation, Tires .........................280
424 INDEX
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...............60
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..............61
Safety Defects, Reporting .................409
Safety Information, Tire ..................262
Safety Tips .............................59
Satellite Radio ......................207,212
Satellite Radio Antenna ..................214
Schedule, Maintenance ...................386
Seat Belt Maintenance ...................362
Seat Belt Reminder ......................38
Seat Belts ............................32,33
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ......37
And Pregnant Women ..................40
Child Restraint .................50,51,52,56
Extender ............................40
Front Seat .........................33,34
Operating Instructions ..................34
Pretensioners .........................38
Rear Seat ............................33
Reminder ...........................168
Untwisting Procedure ...................38
Seats .................................92
Easy Entry ..........................100
Heated ..............................95
Lumbar Support .......................94
Memory .............................98
Power ..............................92
Rear Folding .........................97
Reclining ............................93
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ............15,168
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .........350,383
Self-Sealing Tires .......................279
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................13
Service Assistance ......................406
Service Contract ........................408
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) ..................170
Service Manuals ........................409
Setting the Clock ..............186,190,196,207
Settings, Personal .......................182
Shifting ..............................237
Automatic Transmission ..........237,240,245
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage .............37
Shoulder Belts ..........................33
Side Airbag ............................46
Signals, Turn .......................107,163
INDEX 425
10
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On .............250
SmartBeams ...........................104
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ................279
Snow Tires ............................280
Spare Tire .......................274,275,315
Spark Plugs ...........................340
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..........118,121
Speedometer ..........................163
Starting ..............................234
Automatic Transmission ................235
Engine Fails to Start ...................235
Starting and Operating ...................234
Starting Procedures .....................234
Steering
Column Controls .....................106
Linkage ............................346
Power ...........................255,346
Tilt Column ......................115,116
Wheel, Tilt .......................115,116
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ..............................215
Storage ...........................153,370
Storage, Vehicle .....................226,370
Storing Your Vehicle .....................370
Sun Roof .............................146
Sunglasses Storage ......................140
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag .......41
Synthetic Engine Oil .....................339
System, Navigation .....................206
Tachometer ...........................164
Telescoping Steering Column ...........115,116
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .......221
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ......166,313
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ..............54
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ...............15
Theft System (Security Alarm) ..............15
Tilt Steering Column ..................115,116
Tire and Loading Information Placard .......267
Tire Identification Number (TIN) ...........266
Tire Markings .........................262
Tire Safety Information ...................262
Tires ...........................61,271,410
Aging (Life of Tires) ...................277
Air Pressure .........................271
Alignment ..........................278
426 INDEX
Chains .............................279
Changing ........................314,317
Compact Spare .......................274
Flat Changing ........................314
General Information ...................271
High Speed .........................273
Inflation Pressures ....................272
Jacking ..........................314,317
Life of Tires .........................277
Load Capacity ....................267,268
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .........281
Quality Grading ......................410
Radial .............................274
Replacement .........................277
Rotation ............................280
Safety ...........................262,271
Self-Sealing ..........................279
Sizes ...............................264
Snow Tires ..........................280
Spare Tire ...........................315
Spinning ............................275
Tread Wear Indicators ..................276
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .............303
Torque Converter Clutch .................243
Towing ..............................298
Behind a Motor Home .................309
Disabled Vehicle ......................325
Guide ..............................301
Recreational .........................309
Weight .............................301
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home .......309
Traction Control ........................257
Traction Control Light ...................257
Traction Control Switch ..................257
Trailer Towing .........................298
Cooling System Tips ...................309
Hitches .............................301
Minimum Requirements ................304
Trailer and Tongue Weight ..............303
Wiring .............................307
Trailer Towing Guide ....................301
Trailer Weight .........................301
Transmission ..........................356
Automatic .....................240,245,356
Fluid ..............................384
Shifting ............................237
INDEX 427
10
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ...................21
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink威) ..........................141
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ...................21
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ......17
Transporting Pets ........................58
Tread Wear Indicators ...................276
Trip Odometer .........................167
Trunk Release, Emergency .................32
Trunk Release Remote Control ..............31
Turn Signals ........................107,163
UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) ............72
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..............410
Universal Transmitter ....................141
Unleaded Gasoline ......................289
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .............38
Vanity Mirrors ..........................71
Variance, Compass ......................179
Vehicle Certification Label ................295
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ..........6
Vehicle Loading ..................268,295,297
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ............7
Vehicle Storage ......................226,370
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) .........15
Video Entertainment System
(Rear Seat Video System) .................210
Warning Flasher, Hazard .................312
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) ............163
Warnings and Cautions ....................6
Warranty Information ....................408
Washer, Adding Fluid ..............112,114,347
Washers, Headlight .....................113
Washers, Windshield .................110,347
Washing Vehicle ........................359
Wheel Alignment and Balance .............278
Wheel and Wheel Trim ...................360
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ...............360
Wheel Bearings ........................358
Wind Buffeting ......................30,148
Window Airbag (Side Curtain) ............42,46
428 INDEX
Window Fogging .......................227
Windows ..............................27
Power ..............................27
Windshield Defroster .................220,225
Windshield Washers ...............109,110,347
Fluid ..............................347
Windshield Wiper Blades .................347
Windshield Wipers ......................109
Wiper Blade Replacement .................347
Wipers, Intermittent .....................110
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ...................111
INDEX 429
10
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
